Tips Category RSS Feed | GameSkinny.com Tips RSS Feed on GameSkinny.com https://www.gameskinny.com/ en Launch Media Network Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Hyper Train https://www.gameskinny.com/c59q5/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-hyper-train https://www.gameskinny.com/c59q5/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-hyper-train Fri, 09 Dec 2022 15:20:45 -0500 John Schutt

While Pokemon Scarlet and Violet can be relatively simple games if all you do is catch 'mons and follow the story, but if you dig into the numbers beneath the surface, and you'll find a rabbit hole that keeps going. Hyper training is one such entrance to said rabbit hole and is one of the primary — and easiest — ways to improve your team's individual values or IVs. IVs are hidden traits that determine how their stat grow and are unique to each Pokemon.

No two Pokemon will have the same IVs, not even those of identical species, level, and type. That means you need to farm for a proper set of IVs based on your Pokemon's base stats; then, if you want it to be endgame-ready, hyper train its best IVs to their maximum. We'll cover how to actually do hyper training in this guide.

How to IV Train in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

You gain access to hyper training midway through the story. There's an NPC just north of the Montenevera Pokemon Center standing next to an Abomasnow who, when you talk to him, offers to hyper train a member of your team in exchange for a Bottle Cap.

Bottle Caps are a rare and expensive item you can only find in large quantities late in a playthrough or through high-star Tera Raids. Their easiest to come by once you complete the campaign and head to any Delibird Presents store in the General Goods section.

The catch? One Bottle Cap costs 20,000 Poke Dollars, a princely sum unless you've been farming Raids for sellable materials. Worse, the NPC will only train one Stat per Bottle Cap, so if you want to max out multiple stats on your perfect team, you'll either be spending a massive amount of money or hoping for Cap drops from Raids.

There is also an exceptionally rare item available at the Port Marinada Auction house: a Gold Bottle Cap. When used, Gold Bottle Caps immediately max out all of a single Pokemon's IVs, making every one of its stats able to reach its maximum possible value. Don't expect to see these very often; you'll likely spend a small fortune getting just one or a few of them.

And that's about it for how to hyper train in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. It's a game of priorities: Which team member do you want to take to their limits, and how much are you willing to spend to do so?

If you have a good Iron Hands for Raids, you'll want to focus on its HP and Attack stats, which is at least 40,000 Poke Dollars down the drain. You can easily make that money back with a few Raids, but it feels like a lot at the start.

For more Pokemon content, check out our guides on how to get Tera Shards, the best Pokemon for Tera Raids, and how to beat 6-Star Tera Raids. Our guides hub has more.

]]>
Destiny 2: Guitar Error Code Explained https://www.gameskinny.com/9223r/destiny-2-guitar-error-code-explained https://www.gameskinny.com/9223r/destiny-2-guitar-error-code-explained Fri, 09 Dec 2022 15:16:25 -0500 John Schutt

The Destiny 2 Guitar error code is one you can experience on both PC and consoles during regular play and especially during the release of a new expansion, Raid, Dungeon, or other high-profile content. Whenever it hits you, you’ll be booted from whatever activity you were doing and any Fireteam you were a part of and end up back in orbit alone. Learn more about the Guitar error and what you can do about it here.

How to Fix the Guitar Error Code in Destiny 2

Guitar errors happen, according to the official Bungie Help support page, “when too many items aren't picked up off the ground in an activity, such as Gambit.” They advise you pick up everything you can off the ground to alleviate those errors in most cases. Items to pick up include:

  • Orbs of Power
  • Glimmer
  • Engrams (Rare, Legendary, Powerful, etc.)
  • Ammo (Primary, Special, Heavy)

Gathering enough objects on the ground to cause a Guitar error takes some effort, as you have to overload your connection to the servers with all the data being sent between you and the objects. However, there are other times Guitar errors occur: in moments of heavy load on Bungie servers more generally.

Guitar can also occur on Bungie’s end, where Destiny servers are having issues handling the massive load of too many players. Here are a few ways to keep track of and fix Guitar errors.

Check the Server Status

The official Bungie Help Twitter Account usually has updates within 15 minutes of Guitar error increases beginning, and while they might not have a timeline on a fix, you at least know you’re not alone. You can also check the status of your device’s or service’s servers on their respective pages:

Check Your Connection

There are a few ways to ensure your connection is not the issue.

  • Run a speed test on speedtest.net and watch out for packet loss, inconsistent speeds, and other issues.
  • Restart your router.
  • Check for outages from your internet service provider.

If you confirm the Guitars aren’t a problem on your end and Bungie or the wider community reports that it's something they need to fix, there isn’t much you can do but wait for the problems to subside. Issues tend to be resolved in a couple of hours, though larger-scale outages might drag into the afternoon and evening, depending on the severity. For more guides on the game itself, check out our Destiny 2 guides hub.

]]>
Destiny 2: Weasel Error Code Explained https://www.gameskinny.com/r4457/destiny-2-weasel-error-code-explained https://www.gameskinny.com/r4457/destiny-2-weasel-error-code-explained Fri, 09 Dec 2022 15:10:02 -0500 John Schutt

The Destiny 2 Weasel error is a common one you can experience on both PC and consoles, especially during the release of a new expansion, season, Dungeon, or other important content that sees an influx of players. Whenever it hits you, you'll be unceremoniously kicked from the game, winding up floating in orbit. If you want to know more about the Weasel error and what you can do about it, read on.

How to Fix the Weasel Error Code in Destiny 2

Weasel errors are "an all-encompassing error message that is usually an indicator that you are experiencing a general networking issue," according to the official Bungie Help support page. As noted, they are usually on your end (client-side), whether because of an inconsistent internet connection or other connection problems from your PC or console and the Destiny servers.

However, Weasel can also occur in the other direction, where Destiny servers are having issues connecting to a perfectly stable player device. Here are a few ways to track and fix Weasel errors.

Check the Server Status

Staying on top of things, the official Bungie Help Twitter Account usually has updates on Weasel error increases in the range of 15 minutes after they begin to occur. While timelines will vary, and the team usually can pinpoint an exact moment errors will get squashed, you at least know you're not alone, and something's being done.

To stay in the loop, keep an eye on your respective service's server status:

Check Your Connection

Sometimes it's your connection that causes the Weasel error to pop up. Here's what you can do to eliminate that possibility, or at least confirm it is or isn't on your end. 

  • Run a speed test on speedtest.net and watch out for packet loss, inconsistent speeds, and other issues.
  • Restart your router.
  • Check for outages from your internet service provider.

If you confirm the Weasels aren't a problem on your end and Bungie or the wider community reports that it's something they need to fix, there isn't much you can do but wait for the problems to subside. Issues tend to be resolved in a couple of hours, though larger-scale outages might drag into the afternoon and evening, depending on the severity.

We wish you could do more to deal with Weasel errors in Destiny 2, but as an online game, you're at the mercy of either Bungie's servers, your platform's services, or your personal connection. For more guides on the game itself, check out our Destiny 2 guides hub.

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: Should You Tell Magik About the Party? https://www.gameskinny.com/9xn0e/marvels-midnight-suns-should-you-tell-magik-about-the-party https://www.gameskinny.com/9xn0e/marvels-midnight-suns-should-you-tell-magik-about-the-party Fri, 09 Dec 2022 15:07:44 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

One of the first major Abbey storylines in Marvel's Midnight Suns revolves around Magik's birthday. Nico is planning a surprise birthday party for her, but just about everyone you ask to help out with it will tell you how much Magik hates surprises. Every time you talk with her before the party, you'll be given a chance to tell her about it. Here's what happens for both options.

Should You Tell Magik About the Party?

The short answer is yes, telling Magik about the surprise party Nico is throwing has no downsides and can earn you some friendship points with Magik.

To tell her, approach her in the Abbey and talk to her. Say that you need to tell her about the party and she'll tell you how much she hates surprises. Then either say that you're telling her because you love the drama of it all or that you think she genuinely needed to know. She'll appreciate both responses equally and then go back about her life.

When the night of the party finally rolls around on the twelfth day of the game, the same thing will happen regardless of whether you told Magik or not. The only difference between the two outcomes is that Magik will pretend to act surprised by the party as opposed to actually being surprised.

During the party regardless of your choice, Magik will destroy the cake and storm out into Limbo and you'll be tasked with going after her.

How to Get Magik to Return to the Party

Before you follow Magik into Limbo, you'll have the chance to talk with the heroes at the party and listen to their advice on how to bring her back. If you can bring her back, you'll not only get some major friendship points with Magik and Nico, but you'll get a big friendship boost with the rest of the heroes as well.

Head into Limbo and you'll find Magik sitting alone in a house at the very end of the main path. Speak with her and tell her "Come back. You can ask her yourself." After that, tell her that her secret is safe with you and then say nothing two times in a row to let her vent. For the final dialogue option, tell her to come back to the party.

When she makes it back, you'll be able to chat with everyone at the party and they'll all say how much it means to them that you were able to bring her back. The next day, you'll get a text from Magik asking to hang out. Accept it and she'll say that you two are friends, and you'll have the chance to earn even more friendship points with her.

All's well that ends well in this scenario in Midnight Suns. If you need further tips for the game, check out our other Marvel's Midnight Suns guides such as what tarot cards do or where to get the Elemental Rods.

]]>
Dwarf Fortress: How to Butcher Animals https://www.gameskinny.com/hxdsu/dwarf-fortress-how-to-butcher-animals https://www.gameskinny.com/hxdsu/dwarf-fortress-how-to-butcher-animals Fri, 09 Dec 2022 15:03:17 -0500 Ashley Shankle

Butchering animals is dirty business, but some dwarf has to do it. Butchering animals is one of a few ways to keep food on the table in Dwarf Fortress, but the process is less obvious than what players coming from Rimworld may be used to.

You can butcher animals and livestock in Dwarf Fortress, but there are limitations on which animals you can butcher. Pets and tamed animals who simply died or were killed otherwise also cannot be butchered for parts and meat.

Animals killed by your hunters or tamed animals can both be butchered with relative ease, though. Here's how.

How to Slaughter Animals in Dwarf Fortress

First and foremost, you need a Butcher's Shop set up. This can be found under the Build menu in Workshops -> Farming -> Butcher. You'll need this whether you're looking to butcher wild or tame animals.

You'll get a lot more than meat from most butchering tasks, as bones, organs, and other parts have uses.

How to Designate Livestock for Butchering

This is the more straightforward task, as you don't need to have any dwarves assigned as Hunters.

Open the Labor menu (the 'y' key), and click over to the Creatures tab, then the Pets/Livestock tab. You can mark animals for slaughter via the small butcher knife icon among the others to the far right in their listings.

Once you've done this, the tame animal marked for slaughter will be taken to the Butcher's Shop and taken care of without any further input from you.

How to Butcher Other Animals

If you've got at least one Hunter dwarf roaming the area for prey, they will bring their kills back to the settlement and butcher them automatically at — you guessed it! — the Butcher's Shop.

It's convenient that this system works without outside input, but not every fresh corpse your dwarves have at their disposal is a Hunters' mark. Hunters may kill additional animals by accident while on the hunt, or maybe something crazy happens above ground. In either case, there are opportunities for additional animals to butcher for meat and parts.

You can designate dwarves as Hunters within the Labor menu under the default Work Details tab, just as you do with Minters, Plant Gatherers, and others. The designated dwarf or dwarves will gear up and head out to hunt once assigned.

Refuse Stockpiles Explained

Animal corpses, unlike the corpses of dwarves or the other races in Dwarf Fortress, are categorized as refuse and can be stored in stockpiles specifically marked to hold refuse.

You'll want a refuse stockpile for piling up animal corpses for butchering. You can put it indoors or outdoors, as long as it's close enough to your Butcher's Shop. However, there is one more step to be done before you're set on this front. And that is to allow your dwarves to collect refuse from outdoors.

What are Standing Orders?

To do this, you'll have to familiarize yourself with yet another portion of the Labor menu. This time, you'll be working with Standing Orders. This is found under Standing Orders tab, which is found under Labor (and conveniently the tab just next to the default Work Details tab). You'll want to select the "Refuse and Dumping" tab.

By default, gathering refuse from outside at all is disallowed. To get your dwarves to start hauling in animal carcasses, you'll need to click on 'Workers ignore outdoor refuse' to toggle it to instead by "Workers gather outdoor refuse".

You may want to whittle down further what's allowed in the stockpile you're using for animal carcasses themselves so their resulting body parts are stored elsewhere. You can do this by selecting the stockpile and then clicking 'Custom' to manually set that the stockpile will only take bodies.

Now that you know how to butcher animals, you should be able to keep a steady flow of meat flowing in for use in meals. Butchery is indeed a dirty job, but somebody's gotta do it. If you found this guide helpful, consider checking out our other Dwarf Fortress guides, such as how to get seeds and how to feed animals.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Best Grass-Type Pokemon https://www.gameskinny.com/raryt/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-grass-type-pokemon https://www.gameskinny.com/raryt/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-grass-type-pokemon Fri, 09 Dec 2022 14:08:59 -0500 John Schutt

Grass-type Pokemon have always played second-fiddle to the Fire-type master race, and other types — Dragon, Psychic, and more recently, Fairy — have stood even farther ahead. Sadly, that’s still true in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

The best Grass types don’t provide the stat lines or the weakness coverages of their competition, but they remain a strong niche pick against Ground, Rock, and Water. Their strength against Electric is also beneficial, as this generation has some strong Electric types. Here are the best of them.

Top Five Best Grass-Type Pokemon in Scarlet and Violet

There aren’t too many Grass-types available in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, and even fewer truly worth using, but the best of them still scratch at the top tier for casual play.

You’d be hard-pressed to use any of the options on this list and be found wanting during a playthrough, though don’t expect to take them into endgame Tera Raids or other high-difficulty content. Some may have uses in competitive play, though not many.

Meowscarada

Sprigatito’s final evolution might have the most weaknesses out of all the starter options, but it’s also the fastest by a wide margin with a very usable attack stat to boot. Better, its dual Grass/Dark typing makes it an excellent choice for many of the later-game Gyms, Titan fights, and even the Elite Four. Of course, you will want something to deal with Fire, as some of the storyline capstone fights are designed to counter most compositions.

Perhaps the best reason to choose Meowscarada is its unique attack, called Flower Trick, which always crits, never misses, and has a good base power of 70. It’s a nightmare for any Pokemon weak to Grass moves, and coupled with Meowscarada’s inherently high Speed; you’re liable to get it off before your opponent.

Tsareena

The final evolution in the Bounsweet line, Tsareena won’t be winning any speed races, which puts it at something of a disadvantage against typically faster Fire and Flying types. Still, if it can survive a hit, its naturally high attack gives it a chance to clap back hard. Thanks to its good defense and special defense stats, Tsareena can probably tank most incoming attacks, even if they’re super effective.

Its other strength is in one of its Abilities, called Queenly Majesty, which stops opponents from using Priority moves. Priority is a complex mechanic that helps determine what order opposing Pokemon will use their moves, and specific attacks have a higher or lower Priority value than others. Think Protect, Detect, or Endure, though the list is much longer than that. Tsareena also can’t be put to sleep thanks to its hidden Ability Sweet Veil, cutting an otherwise large disadvantage from its weaknesses.

Arboliva

The special attacker to Tsareena’s standard attacker, Arboliva is a Grass/Normal dual-type, which, while opening up a few new weaknesses, gives it additional resistances as well, specifically an immunity to Ghost moves. And while its speed stat is actual trash, both of its defenses are pretty good, meaning it can take a few hits before it’s in dire need of healing or assistance.

Arboliva’s Seed Sower Ability also gives it some natural healing by summoning Grassy Terrain, though that will also heal the opposing Pokemon, so take them down quickly. Arboliva has a strong move list as well, with plenty of special-attack-heavy options, and can even learn some Fairy, Bug, and Ground-type TMs for additional coverage.

Gogoat

This spot is something of a tossup between Gogoat and Leafeon, but Gogoat wins thanks to its much higher overall survivability. Neither of its defense stats are great, but its HP base stat is almost double Leafeon’s, and both its attack stats are well in contention. The only other detriment is its below-average speed, but like Iron Hands, Gogoat can survive plenty if properly trained.

As a mixed attacker, whether you focus on standard or special attacks depends on your Gogoat’s IVs and Nature. It can learn some of the best Grass moves in either category, as well as Electric, Ground, Flying, Psychic, and even Fighting-type moves, giving you almost too many coverage options to count.

Brute Bonnet

The Scarlet-exclusive Paradox Pokemon from the ancient past, Brute Bonnet makes the list purely on its statline alone. Like most entries on this list, its speed is its dump stat, and don’t expect much out of special attacks either. However, equip this mushroom-looking mother trucker with Outrage, Thrash, Giga Impact, or Body Press, and watch your opponent’s HP bar quickly deplete.

Brute Bonnet’s own HP and defense stats are nothing to sneeze at either, so while it isn’t currently the meta for endgame content, it’s still a powerful contender for one of the best Grass-type Pokemon in all of Scarlet and Violet.

Those are our picks for the five best Grass-type Pokemon in Scarlet and Violet. We’ve chosen them thanks to their strong stats, move lists, and overall usability, but there are other options in the game if you don’t like some or all of the choices we’ve made. We’ve covered plenty of other Pokemon-related topics here, including the best Gym order, checking and raising friendship, and getting Nature mints. Our Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides hub has more.

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2 Complete Act 1 Walkthrough Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/f4kad/hello-neighbor-2-complete-act-1-walkthrough-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/f4kad/hello-neighbor-2-complete-act-1-walkthrough-guide Fri, 09 Dec 2022 13:32:03 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Hello Neighbor 2 marks the return of the incredibly creepy and unsettling Theodore Peterson. To uncover the mysteries surrounding his clandestine activities, it's your job in Act 1 to explore Peterson's house, this time as a journalist, and figure out what's going on. And if you're wondering how to go about that, you may need a walkthrough to help. 

Of course, Peterson's secrets aren't given up that easily, and there are plenty of puzzles to solve along the way. With that in mind, this walkthrough guide is here to help in your investigation, providing all of the solutions and answers to the roadblocks you'll face in Act 1. 

Hello Neighbor Act 1 Walkthrough

After crashing the car in the barn, flip the switch on the left side to open the door. Go through, and grab the key off of the wall on the left. Use it to unlock the padlock on the door to the right. Go inside and pick up the blur gear off of the table.

Exit that room. Look for the gear mechanism on the wall to the right of the main barn door. Place the blue gear in the blue slot, then pick up the crowbar in the crate behind the red barrel. Use the crowbar to smash the glass display case to the right of the red barrel and pick up the green gear. Place it in the green slot in the mechanism.

Go back to where you crashed the car, and use the crowbar to pull off the red board near the ground by the hay bale. Crawl through the space, and climb the ladder up. At the top, climb up the ledge, and pick up the red gear on the table. Jump back down through the nearby hole in the floor, and place the red gear in the red slot in the mechanism. Pull the switch by the mechanism to open the barn door.

After the cutscene, you'll wake in a room with computer monitors. Exit the building, and follow the dirt path to the street. You'll see Peterson’s blue house in front of you, behind the clump of stop signs. But don't go there just yet. Instead, go behind the green house with the treehouse across the street. 

How to Find the Scissors

The scissors are required to access the second story in Peterson's house, and while don't have to get them right now, it's best to get it out of the way now.

Behind the green house, you’ll find a trampoline you can use to reach the roof and then the upper level of the treehouse. Jump at least two times on the trampoline to get the height you need.

Jump over to the treehouse from the roof, and go through the door. Inside, you’ll see a train set on the left side with a track going around the room and a cardboard robot/knight on the right. The scissors are inside a cardboard depot on the same table as the train set, but you'll need to solve a puzzle first.

In the back left corner, you’ll see a drawing of the cardboard robot on the wall. Move it to get the cardboard robot’s sword arm. Replace the arm on the actual cardboard knight by the door. Now position both of the knight’s arms to reflect the positions in the drawing, which will open a compartment in the robot’s chest, revealing a switch handle.

Take the switch handle, and combine it with the switchboard to the left of the cardboard depot on the table with the train set. Flip the switch to change the track for the model train, which will push the scissors out of the cardboard depot.

Now go across the street to Peterson's House, and enter through the unlocked door on the right side.

How to Get the Keys for the Red Basement Door

Much of Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 follows the same basic conceit of Hello Neighbor: the ultimate objective is to unlock the red basement door and see what's inside. There are four keys scattered throughout the house, locked behind four different puzzles of varying difficulty. 

Dollhouse Puzzle Solution (Red Door Key 1)

In the kitchen, you'll notice the same mystical dollhouse from Hello Neighbor on the left side by the windows. Solving this puzzle requires you to find three hidden dolls in various locations on the first floor of the house, then place them in the correct order on the stands on the dollhouse. You can find the correct order by looking at the picture on the refrigerator. 

Where to Find the Girl Doll

Facing the dollhouse, turn right and look for the small red board nailed to the wall. Use the crowbar to remove the red board on the wall to reveal the girl doll.

Where to Find the Neighbor Doll

From there, go back to the stairwell leading upstairs. Facing the stairwell, turn right to face the bathroom at the end of the hall. There is a cabinet you can hide in on the right side of the hallway, diagonal to the stairwell, with a painting above it nearly touching the ceiling.

Climb up the cabinet, and interact with the painting to move it, revealing a small passageway that overlooks the kitchen. Pick up the neighbor doll inside.

Where to Find the Boy Doll
Painting Combination Lock Code

Now drop back down, and interact with the frame to the right of the stairwell, the one with the bucolic mountain road scene, and it will shift, revealing a combination lock with three lettered disks of seven letters each.

This one is a bit of a head-scratcher, as there’s not a discernable way to deduce the combination outright or by searching for word clues in a traditional sense. Instead of relying on trial and error, turn on the television in the room with the safe (to the left of the stairwell). Nouds of Tanure will appear on the TV screen.

With that information, go back to the combination lock, and turn the lettered disks to read NOT, opening a secret passageway in the wall. Go inside to pick up another crowbar (because why not?) and the boy doll off a shelf on the right side.

Return to the kitchen. Place the girl doll on the left, the boy doll in the middle, and the neighbor doll on the right. With them in place, a compartment will open on the left side of the dollhouse, giving you the first of four basement door keys. 

Safe Code Solution (Red Door Key 2)

Now return to the room with the safe for the next key. The safe code is a four-number combination found on four numbered toy blocks found around the house. If you look above the safe itself, you'll notice four colored flags illuminated by a lamp. These colors correspond to the colors on the four blocks and denote the block/number order for the safe code

Toy Block 1 (Green, No.8)

The first block is the green block, number 8, to the left of the safe on the same table.  

Toy Block 2 (Red, No.1)

The second block is the red block, number 1. It can be found on the left side of the same room with the safe, in a desk by the window, to the left of the green couch.

Toy Block 3 (Blue, No.9)

The third block is the blue block, number 9, and can be found in the toilet in the bathroom by the kitchen.

Toy Block 4 (Yellow/Orange, No. 4)

The fourth block is the yellow/orange block found behind a plate in the refrigerator in the kitchen.

Return to the safe room, and place the blocks in the following order: 

  • Red
  • Blue
  • Green
  • Yellow

The safe code is 1984. Punch that into the safe, and grab the second red basement door key. 

Toy Car Puzzle and Photo Frame Puzzle Solutions (Red Keys 3+4)

Now use the scissors to cut the police tape on the stairs. You'll find two puzzles on the second story of Peterson's house: the toy race car puzzle and the photo frame puzzle (which requires you to find four picture pieces). To minimize backtracking and pick up all of the items and picture pieces in the most efficient manner, we'll cover both puzzle steps at the same time below. 

At the top of the stairs, go through the door in front of you (to the left, not the right). Inside the room, interact with the green box underneath the lamp by the desk and chair ahead to pick up a switch handle. 

Turn left, back toward the entrance, and combine the switch handle with the switch plate on the wall by the bookshelf. Pulls the switch to move the bookcase and reveal a hidden room. Use the scissors to remove the spiderwebs from the green device on the table to the left, and remove the battery from the device for the toy car puzzle. 

Picture Piece 1

Exit the secret room, and cut the police tape on the bookshelf on the other side of the room near the sofa and chairs. Grab the first picture piece for the photo frame puzzle. 

Where to Find the Pressure Plate Weight

Turn right, and go through the archway into the bedroom. Turn left immediately to find the photo frame; you can go ahead and place the first picture piece now or wait until later. Either way, you'll notice a hiding cabinet near a lamp on the far side of the room, as well as a taller shelf in the back right corner with a spiderweb and an item on top of it. Climb the hiding cabinet, and cut the spiderweb to get the weight. 

Picture Piece 2

Now exit this area, and go to the end of the second-floor hallway. Use the crowbar to open the crate at the end and pick up the second picture piece. 

Picture Piece 3

From there, go into the bedroom on your left. Straight ahead, you'll see a pillow fort with some chairs. Use the scissors to cut open the white pillow with a grey and green patch for the third picture piece. 

Picture Piece 4

To the left of the pillow fort is a pressure plate. Put the weight on the pressure plate to open a locked armoire on the opposite side of the room. Interact with the armoire for the fourth and final picture piece. 

Remote Control Car Key

Don't run back to the photo frame just yet, though! Place the battery you got from the green device in the secret room into the control stick by the bed to your left. Interact with the control stick to send the remote control car down the track and underneath the bed. Interact with it again to reverse the toy car up the track with the third red door key. 

With that done, return to the photo frame, and place the four picture pieces (in no particular order). With the photo complete, a secret compartment will open in the shelf to the right of the frame. You may need to stand on the nearby cardboard boxes to look inside and grab the fourth and final red door key. 

From there, go back downstairs, and use the keys to unlock the basement door. Go down the stairs, and interact with the newspaper on the set of drawers by the lamp on the right side. A cutscene will play, and the newspaper will be replaced by another key. 

Use that key to open the basement storm doors leading outside. After another cutscene, follow the trail of paper airplanes out to the road, then across town. Follow them left at the bakery, which will take you up a few flights of wooden stairs and platforms to the Museum. Go up the stairs into the Museum's foyer, and interact with the shovel on the right side by the locked door. 

And that's the end of our walkthrough guide for Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1. On to Act 2 and the Museum! 

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: How to Use Havens https://www.gameskinny.com/78cwy/marvels-midnight-suns-how-to-use-havens https://www.gameskinny.com/78cwy/marvels-midnight-suns-how-to-use-havens Fri, 09 Dec 2022 12:23:26 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

Havens are one of a handful of ways to spend time with your favorite characters in Marvel's Midnight Suns. They serve as a fantastic way to increase your friendship level with selected characters, provided you've picked the right spot.

In this guide, we'll go over how to find Havens as well as how to make the most of your time spent in them. You'll have to explore the Abbey a bit to find them, after which you can invite other characters to them.

How to Find Havens

As you explore the Abbey grounds, you'll encounter zones that have a blue circle of mist surrounding them. Walk up to the zone and interact with it to discover a Haven location that gets added to your list. Once you've discovered at least one Haven, you'll be able to invite heroes to them.

How to Use Havens

Once you've found a Haven, you'll be able to invite a hero there during the day. Be warned, you can only visit each Haven one time and each hero can only be invited out to a Haven once. This means that if you want to invite someone out, you need to think hard about if it's for an activity you think they'll enjoy. Most heroes will gain five friendship points from just being asked to hang out with you somewhere, regardless of where, but if they love the activity/spot, they'll gain seven points.

While at a Haven, you'll have a conversation with the person you've invited allowing you to get to know them a little bit better. The conversation also serves as a way to earn even more friendship points. Choose the dialogue options that you think would make them like you most and you can earn additional points over options that they don't like. 

At the end of your time hanging out with them, you can give the hero a gift. Gifts are found across the Abbey and can be bought from the Gift Shop upgrade purchased in the Forge. The rarer the gift and the more it seems to suit the character you're giving it to, the more they'll like it and the more friendship points you'll earn.

Havens are a good way to boost a single character's Friendship Level to make them even more effective in combat or if you simply want to spend more time with them. Even though it's a little stressful knowing that you won't get a Haven spot back once it's been used, you can always save before inviting someone out and reloading it if they didn't love the venue.

Check out our other guides on Marvel's Midnight Suns on GameSkinny.

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: Standing Stones Puzzle Solution Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/ja7sq/marvels-midnight-suns-standing-stones-puzzle-solution-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/ja7sq/marvels-midnight-suns-standing-stones-puzzle-solution-guide Fri, 09 Dec 2022 10:42:31 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are plenty of opportunities for Marvel's Midnight Suns players to collect fine loot, but some of the best loot comes from the legendary arcane chests. Players can get three of those relatively quickly after completing the Standing Stones puzzle.

Our guide will show you how to solve the Standing Stones puzzle in Marvel's Midnight Suns, including all the exact locations.

Enter the Standing Stones Area

In order to enter the area with the Standing Stones puzzle, you need to go to the spot in the eastern part of the the Abbey, which is indicated on the map above, and use the Word of Power: Reveal to unlock the doors to the area of the puzzle.

After that you need to find and reveal the three hidden glyphs in the Abbey area, which will provide you with a series of five symbols that serve as keys to the puzzle.

Glyph Location #1

The first glyph can be found in the Barracks Chapel of Abbey. Enter the chapel and approach the southern wall, as indicated on the map above.

You should see the first sequence of symbols in the frame on the wall. Note that every player may have a different sequence, so it's best to memorize it. Write it down, or simply make a screenshot. This sequence unlocks the first legendary arcane chest later on.

Glyph Location #2

In order to find the next glyph players must once again use the Word of Power: Reveal to unlock the northeastern part of the Abbey area.

Head towards the Agatha's Cottage, which is indicated on the map above, and look out for the second sequence of symbols on the wall of the cottage right across the fire mantle. Note the symbols and continue on.

Glyph Location #3

The third and final glyph can be found after using the Word of Power: Reveal once more in order to unlock the northwestern area of the Abbey. Then, enter the Lilith's Garden, which is indicated on the map above.

You will find a breakable wall inside the greenhouse, so use Word of Power: Break to demolish it. This will open a hidden area with the stairs going down, which you should follow until you come to the opposite wall with the final sequence of symbols.

Solve the Standing Stones Puzzle

When you have all three sequences in your possession, go back to the Standing Stones area, and follow these steps:

  1. Approach the stone with a symbol that corresponds to the first symbol of the first glyph.
  2. Interact with the stone to activate it.
  3. Repeat the same steps with the rest of the stones in the order their symbols are presented on the glyph.

As you enter the correct sequence from the first glyph, one of the three chests will appear in the center of the Standing Stones area. Repeat the same actions for the other two sequences and open up the rest of the legendary arcane chests with your well earned loot.

That's everything you need to know on how to solve the Standing Stones puzzle in Marvel's Midnight Suns. For more Marvel's Midnight Suns tips and tricks articles, please visit our dedicated hub page.

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2: Photo Frame Puzzle Solution Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o7jh9/hello-neighbor-2-photo-frame-puzzle-solution-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/o7jh9/hello-neighbor-2-photo-frame-puzzle-solution-guide Thu, 08 Dec 2022 17:02:03 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Once you get the scissors and cut the police tape in Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1, you'll be able to access the second story of Peterson's house. Here, you'll be met with two additional puzzles that reward two more keys to the red door leading to the basement. One of these is the photo frame puzzle, one of the more involved tasks to complete on Day 1. Here's how to solve it. 

This guide is part of our larger Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 walkthrough. If you're looking for more puzzle solutions and tips for navigating Peterson's house and the surrounding areas on Day 1, head right over here

How to Solve the Photo Frame Puzzle

You'll find the photo frame — not to be confused with the picture frame hiding the combination lock on the first floor — in the second-story bedroom of Peterson's house; it's the room with the bookshelf and hidden space concealing the battery for the toy race car. If you don't know where that is, it's the room at the top of the stairs to the left. 

Inside the room, go right toward the sofa and chairs, then go right through the archway, and turn left to find the photo frame on a table by a tall shelf and cardboard boxes.

Solving this puzzle requires you to find four picture pieces scattered around the top floor. But before we go over their locations, you'll need to get the weight for a pressure plate later on. 

How to Get the Weight for the Pressure Plate

Go to the back of the bedroom with the photo frame, and climb on top of the hiding cabinet in the back of the room by the lamp on the chair near the cardboard box. You’ll see some spiderwebs covering an object on top of the large, brown shelving unit in the back right corner. Use the scissors to cut those away and grab the weight.

Where to Find All Picture Pieces

Picture Piece 1 Location

With the weight in your possession, drop down and exit the bedroom through the archway by the photo frame. On the other side, stop and turn right. Cut the police tape on the blue shelf to grab the picture piece. 

Picture Piece 2 Location

Now leave this room entirely, and go down the hall toward the second bedroom on this level (the one with the toy race car). Don't go in just yet. Instead, use the crowbar to open the large crate at the end of the hall for the second picture piece. 

Picture Piece 3 Location

Now enter the bedroom. You'll see a pillow fort in front of you on the far side of the room. Look for the white pillow with the grey and green striped patch on it. Cut it open with the scissors for the third of four picture pieces. 

Picture Piece 4 Location


Standing on the pressure plate.

From the pillow, turn left. You'll see a blue and orange pressure plate on the floor near a shelf. Place the weight on the pressure plate, which will open a cabinet on the opposite side of the room by the race car track. Inspect it for the fourth picture piece. 

Return to the bedroom with the photo frame, and place all four picture pieces into the frame. A secret compartment will open in the shelf to the right of the photo frame, giving you another key for the locked red door to the basement. For more, head over to our Act 1 safe code guide or our guide on how to solve the dollhouse puzzle

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2: Act 1 Safe Code Answer Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dfmdr/hello-neighbor-2-act-1-safe-code-answer-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dfmdr/hello-neighbor-2-act-1-safe-code-answer-guide Thu, 08 Dec 2022 15:16:38 -0500 Jonathan Moore

If it's not the dollhouse puzzle, one of the first roadblocks you'll encounter in Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 is the office safe. Like most of the riddles in this first-person horror sequel, the solution isn't immediately obvious. You won't just find the code written down somewhere. Instead, you'll have to scour the first floor of Peterson's house to find the answer. 

This guide is part of our larger Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 walkthrough. If you're looking for more puzzle solutions and tips for navigating Peterson's house and the surrounding areas on Day 1, check out this step-by-step guide

How to Find the Safe Code in Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1?

 

We'll provide the exact safe code numbers near the bottom of this article for those who want to know it, grab one of the four basement door keys, and move on to other riddles like the toy car puzzle or the photo puzzle. Simply scroll down. For anyone who wants to do a little searching for the numbers, here's how to find them. 

If you look above the safe, you'll notice a lamp illuminating four flags hanging from a shelf. From left to right: red, blue, green, and yellow. This is a clue to the code's solution. In short, you'll need to track down four colored toy blocks with numbers on them, then arrange them in the correct order to get the correct set of numbers. 

Green Toy Block Location

The green block with the number 8 is the first one we'll pick up because it's the easiest to find. It's directly to the left of the safe on the table.

Red Toy Block Location

The red block with the number 1 is the second one we'll pick up. It can be found on the far left side of the safe room, in a small table to the left of the sofa. 

Blue Toy Block Location

We'll grab the blue block with the number 9 next. Exit the safe room through the door by the safe, and go to the end of the hallway to the bathroom. Look inside the toilet for this toy block. 

Yellow Toy Block Location

Next, we'll get the yellow (orange) block with the number 4. Exit the bathroom, and enter the kitchen. Open the refrigerator, and knock down the plate inside to find this one. 

With the toy blocks in hand, return to the safe room and place them in order on the floor: red, blue, green, yellow. 

What is the Safe Code? 

The safe code for Hello Neighbor 2, Act 1 is: 1984. Punch that in using the keypad on the front of the strongbox, and grab the key for the top lock on the red door leading to the basement. 

This won't be the last safe code or lock combination you'll come across in Hello Neighbor 2 or Act 1. For more, head over to our guides hub for the horror game.

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2 Guide: How to Solve the Toy Race Car Puzzle in Act 1 https://www.gameskinny.com/5a4n8/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-solve-the-toy-race-car-puzzle-in-act-1 https://www.gameskinny.com/5a4n8/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-solve-the-toy-race-car-puzzle-in-act-1 Thu, 08 Dec 2022 14:30:50 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Once you make it to the second story of Peterson's house in Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1, you'll find two puzzles to solve: the photo frame puzzle and the toy car puzzle. It's obvious that a nearby switch handle operates the remote control car on the racetrack, but it's unclear how that lever actually works. You'll need to do a bit more exploring to get the necessary battery. 

Part of our larger Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 walkthrough, this guide only touches on one of several puzzles you'll face in your first hour in the game. If you're looking for more solutions and tips for navigating Peterson's house and the surrounding areas on Day 1, head right over here

Where to Find the Battery for the Remote Control Car

Leave the room with the toy car, and go into the room at the end of the hall (the same one in which you start the photo frame puzzle). Inside, you'll see a chair and desk in front of you, with a lamp just to the right. Inspect the small, rectangular green box underneath the lamp for a switch handle.

Pick it up, and place the switch handle on the switch to the left of the bookcase to your left. Flip the switch to move the bookcase and reveal a hidden room.

Go inside, equip the scissors, and cut the spiderwebs covering the green device on the table on the left side. Remove the battery from the green device, and return to the race car control stick in the other bedroom.

Toy Race Car Puzzle Solution

Insert the battery, and interact with the control stick. The toy car will go down the racetrack and under the bed before stopping. Interact with the control stick again, and the car will reverse from under the bed, up the racetrack, with the third key on top of it. Use this to unlock the bottom lock on the basement door.

And that's that for the remote control car puzzle in Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1. With another Day 1 puzzle solved, you're that much closer to opening the red basement door and finding the dark secrets that still lurk inside Peterson's house. If you need help with the dollhouse, we've got a guide for that right here. If you're looking for the Act 1 safe code, we've got that, too

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2 Guide: How to Get the Scissors in Act 1 https://www.gameskinny.com/v89bd/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-get-the-scissors-in-act-1 https://www.gameskinny.com/v89bd/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-get-the-scissors-in-act-1 Thu, 08 Dec 2022 14:06:00 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Just like its predecessor, Hello Neighbor 2 has plenty of puzzles and riddles to solve. Early in Act 1, you'll need to find the scissors to gain access to the second floor of Peterson's house and nab two of four keys needed to open the locked basement door. But search as you may, you won't actually find the shears in the house. So where are they? 

Only one part of our larger Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 walkthrough, this guide will only get you so far through Peterson's house. If you're looking for more puzzle solutions and tips for your first hour or so with the game, our Day 1 breakdown provides them

Where are the Scissors in Hello Neighbor 2?

The scissors in Hello Neighbor 2 are actually in a house across the street from Peterson's House. You can get these at any time, either before you enter Peterson's House, or after you solve the dollhouse puzzle or crack the downstairs safe code

Look for the green house with the blue treehouse across the street from Peterson's terrifying abode. Go around to the back of the house, and use the trampoline to reach the roof; jump on the trampoline at least two times to get the height you need. From there, jump over to the second story of the treehouse, and go inside. 

How to Solve the Robot Arm Puzzle

You’ll see a train set hub on the left side of the room (with its tracks going around the room) and a cardboard robot (knight) on the right side by the door. The scissors are inside the cardboard depot on the table, but you can't just pluck them out.

Instead, head over to the drawing of the robot in the back left corner. Move it to get the robot's arm. Place the arm on the right side of the actual cardboard robot by the door.

Now position both of the arms (left and right) to reflect the positions in the drawing, which will open a compartment in the robot’s chest, revealing a switch handle.

Take the switch handle, and combine it with the switchboard to the left of the cardboard depot at the train set. Flip the switch to change the track for the model train, which will push the scissors out of the cardboard depot.

Now that you have the scissors, you can cut the police tap on the stairwell and access the second story of Peterson's House in Hello Neighbor 2, Act 1. There you'll find the photo frame puzzle and the race car puzzle, both of which give you two more keys to the locked basement door. 

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: How to Get Arcane Keys https://www.gameskinny.com/lvsvk/marvels-midnight-suns-how-to-get-arcane-keys https://www.gameskinny.com/lvsvk/marvels-midnight-suns-how-to-get-arcane-keys Thu, 08 Dec 2022 12:44:51 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

You figure out pretty early on that you need Arcane Keys in Marvel's Midnight Suns, since so many locked treasure chests in your first few hours in the Abbey require the keys to unlock.

Arcane Keys can seem few and far between for a long while, but as things start opening up and the Hunter gains more powers, you'll be able to start hunting them down and opening the chests for loot drops.

How to Get Arcane Keys in Marvel's Midnight Suns

Side Quests and Hero Quests

One of the most reliable ways to get Arcane Keys early on is to complete side quests as they'll often net you a key. Agatha's quests specifically usually end up with a key or two to use on chests. If you're looking to get four keys quickly, find all four Elemental Rods and place them in their pedestals at Agatha's Altar.

Some of the keys that you can find from completing Agatha's quests are located along the winding paths of the Abbey's grounds that you need to walk down, so make sure to keep an eye out.

The heroes that you've recruited to the Abbey will often request your help for smaller things as well that don't require any actual adventuring or gameplay. Speak to everyone who needs help and you're bound to be offered an Arcane Key among the rewards for helping out. When asked to choose between two outcomes, make sure to pick the one that nets you the most keys.

Sparring

You should be sparring with your teammates every day to further train and bond with Midnight Suns' cast of characters, but in addition to the XP rewards you gain from doing it, you'll sometimes be given an Arcane Key for training.

It doesn't happen every day, but they come up frequently enough that it can turn into a semi-regular source of keys for you to use.

Exploring the Abbey with the 'Reveal' Word of Power

There are Arcane Keys scattered across the Abbey grounds, however, the large majority of them are hidden behind stone tablets and other magical barriers. To access them, you'll need the "Reveal" Word of Power that's acquired from the second Moon Seal.

Once you've got it, you'll be able to reveal secrets hidden behind the symbols that look like a capital "Y" with a half-circle drawn on its upper half. You'll be able to find plenty of Arcane Keys with the Word of Power, so make sure to keep an eye out for the symbol as you adventure around the Abbey.

Night Offerings

Perhaps the most consistent way to get Arcane Keys is by offering up artifacts at the Offering Bowl south of Agatha's Altar. Each night, you can offer up one of the artifacts you've collected from completing missions.

Place the artifact in the bowl and then use a Word of Power. The artifact will disappear and you'll automatically be given an Arcane Key. Be warned: this method destroys the artifact so make sure to research them with Tony in the Forge before offering them up.

With all this in mind, you should be able to rack up Arcane Keys and get to open those locked chests you see all around the Abbey. For more tips, check out our other Marvel's Midnight Suns guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: Elemental Rod Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/pz1ym/marvels-midnight-suns-elemental-rod-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/pz1ym/marvels-midnight-suns-elemental-rod-locations Thu, 08 Dec 2022 12:31:53 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

Elemental Rods are one of the more vital collectibles you can get in Marvel's Midnight Suns, far more useful than the Tarot Cards. Elemental Rods are used for unlocking the second Moon Seal, which opens up even more of the Abbey's campush and can be used for quests and puzzles.

All Elemental Rod Locations

You'll be able to find all of the Elemental Rods right off the bat after you're introduced to Agatha's Altar in the first few hours of Midnight Suns.

You'll need the Moon Seal that the rods unlock to open up more of the Abbey,  so finding the rods is pretty simple given how limited your access to the grounds is. This mean that you should be able to find all four of them in just a few minutes if you know where to look.

Air Rod Location

You'll find the Air Rod in the Whispering Wood section of the map. Head to the peninsula that curves southwest and the rod will be sitting on an altar between two bundles of lit candles.

Water Rod Location

To find the Water Rod, head to the pool on the west side of the Abbey. You'll find the Rod tucked away underneath the wooden bridge on the side facing the main pool area. 

Fire Rod Location

To find the Fire Rod, walk to the Chapel, located on the far south end of the Abbey, past all of the hero bunks. The rod will be sitting on a pedestal on the south end of the room.

Earth Rod Location

You'll need the first Word of Power in order to access the final Elemental Rod. Luckily, you'll learn the word for "Open" during the tutorial, so if you're looking for the rods, you likely already have access to the word.

Head to the Hunter's Folly section of the map and approach the tomb that the Hunter was reanimated inside. Use the first Word of Power when facing the tomb and its doors will open. Inside, you'll find the Earth Rod sitting on a few stones in the corner.

What to do with the Elemental Rods

Once you have all four Elemental Rods in your possession, head back to Agatha's Altar and place them in the four pedestals that are in the center of the area. For whatever reason, you'll need to put them in the proper order which is a complete guessing game if you don't know where each goes.

When facing the altar, they go in this order from left to right:

  • Water
  • Air
  • Earth
  • Fire

You'll get an Arcane Key when you put each rod into its proper altar and, when all four are in their pedestals, the second Moon Seal will appear on the altar.

And with that, you can push on through the Abbey. Take a look at our other Marvel's Midnight Suns guides for more walkthroughs and tips.

]]>
Hello Neighbor 2 Guide: How to Solve the Dollhouse Puzzle in Act 1 https://www.gameskinny.com/z8rkl/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-solve-the-dollhouse-puzzle-in-act-1 https://www.gameskinny.com/z8rkl/hello-neighbor-2-guide-how-to-solve-the-dollhouse-puzzle-in-act-1 Thu, 08 Dec 2022 11:46:30 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Hello Neighbor 2 wastes no time throwing you into its often opaque puzzles. Once you reach Peterson's house in Act 1, you'll find a dollhouse in the kitchen — the same magical model home from the original game. Solving the puzzle rewards you with one of four keys that open the locked basement door in the den. To do so, you'll need to know where to find three dolls hidden in different locations on the first floor. 

Looking at the dollhouse, you'll notice that there are three wooden stands on the replica house: one on the far left, one in the middle, and one on the right. You'll need to place the dolls you find on these stands in a specific order. You can find that order by looking at the drawing on the nearby refrigerator.

This guide is part of our larger Hello Neighbor 2 Act 1 walkthrough. If you're looking for more puzzle solutions and tips for navigating Peterson's house and the surrounding areas on Day 1, we've got you covered up to Act 2 here

How to Find the Dolls in Hello Neighbor 2

Girl Doll Location

Facing the dollhouse, look for the red board nailed to the right wall (the wall separating the kitchen from the den). Use the crowbar to remove the red board to reveal a hidey-hole with the doll inside. 

Neighbor Doll Location

With your back to the dollhouse, exit the kitchen through the door in front of you (which leads into the hall with the bathroom on your right and the stairs on your left). Go to the base of the stairs, and turn completely around to look toward the bathroom, down the hall from where you just came. 

You'll notice a tall hiding cabinet against the wall to your right that has a painting hanging above it, almost touching the ceiling. Climb up the cabinet, and interact with the painting to move it, revealing a small passageway that overlooks the kitchen. Grab the neighbor doll at the end. 

Boy Doll Location

Knowing where to find the boy doll is perhaps one of the more vexing parts of the dollhouse puzzle solution. Drop down out of the duct where you found the neighbor doll, and turn right, facing the wall below the stairs. Interact with the painting of the mountain road scene on the wall. 

Letter Code Combination Lock Solution

When it moves, you'll see a combination lock with three lettered disks of seven letters each. You can find the combination by going to the nearby room with the safe, and turning on the TV. A show called Nouds of Tanure will play, and you'll need to enter the show's acronym into the combination lock. So, the solution is the word NOT

With the right combination, a secret door will open in the wall to the right of the lock. Grab the boy doll from the shelf inside on the right. 

Dollhouse Puzzle Solution

With all three dolls in hand, head back to the dollhouse in the kitchen. Place the dolls in the following order:

  • Girl doll: Left
  • Boy doll: Middle
  • Neighbor doll: Right. 

A secret compartment on the left side of the dollhouse will open once you've placed the final doll. Take the dollhouse key to open the third lock on the barred basement door. 

With that, you've solved the dollhouse puzzle in Act 1 of Hello Neighbor 2 and have one more key to open the basement. There are plenty more riddles and conundrums to decipher and decode, so head over to our guides hub for the game for more tips and tricks. 

]]>
Need for Speed: Unbound — How to Get the BMW M3 GTR https://www.gameskinny.com/pe6bf/need-for-speed-unbound-how-to-get-the-bmw-m3-gtr https://www.gameskinny.com/pe6bf/need-for-speed-unbound-how-to-get-the-bmw-m3-gtr Thu, 08 Dec 2022 11:04:08 -0500 Sergey_3847

The BMW M3 GTR returns once again in Need for Speed: Unbound, as one of the fastest and coolest cars in the game. It is an exact replica of 2006 model from Need for Speed: Heat, and there are a couple of ways how players can get this fantastic sports car.

Our guide will provide you with tips on how to get BMW M3 GTR in Need for Speed: Unbound, including its exact location on the world map.

How to Get the BMW M3 GTR in Need for Speed: Unbound

Complete High Heat Delivery Mission

In Week 4 of the story, Yaz will call you during an S-tier night event  with an offer to start a new High Heat: Level 5 delivery mission from The Blacklist. Players will need to locate BMW M3 GTR and take it to the designated location.

Follow these steps to deliver the car:

  1. Locate the car in Edgewater (red marker on the map above).
  2. Escape the chasing cops, including:
    • 2 SWAT Raptor Trucks.
    • 1 Undercover Camaro.
    • 1 Helicopter.
    • 1 Interceptor Corvette.
  3. Deliver the car to Griffith Parklands (yellow marker on the map above).

Note that you will gain monetary rewards depending on the amount of damages your vehicle takes while delivering it to the client. Here are all the possible rewards:

  • $13,200: highly damaged.
  • $20,000: moderately damaged.
  • $30,000: lightly damaged.
  • $40,000: undamaged.

Fortunately, you will see the damage gauge on the screen and be able to control just how much damage they can afford to this vehicle during the chase. The best way to mitigate the damage is to stop at gas stations to repair the damages.

You can also open the world map during the mission and follow the yellow marker for the shortest route to the delivery location, which can also help you mitigate some of that damage.

Subscribe to EA Play

If you wish to get BMW M3 GTR as soon as possible, then the only other way is to purchase an EA Play subscription:

  • $4,99 a month.
  • $29.99 a year.

It doesn't matter which subscription you choose, you will get BMW M3 GTR right away. But do note that if you purchase the subscription and have not unlocked the car in the story mode, then you will not be able to use it in Career mode, but only in online multiplayer.

BMW M3 GTR Stats

BMW M3 GTR is one of the fastest cars in Need for Speed: Unbound, and here are its characteristics:

  • Engine: 4.0L V8
  • Set Up: Front engine/rear wheel.
  • Transmission: 6-speed.
  • Max Speed: 350 km/h (218 m/h).
  • Horse Power: 741
  • Max Torque: 550
  • Quarter Mile: 10.6
  • Acceleration to 100 km/h (60 m/h): 3.4 seconds.

The car also has a number of customization options, including:

  • Body Kits.
  • Paint and Wrap.
  • Horns.
  • Driving Effects.

That's everything you need to know on how to get BMW M3 GTR in Need for Speed: Unbound, and stay tuned for more Need for Speed: Unbound guides.

]]>
Destiny 2: How to Get Seraph Key Codes https://www.gameskinny.com/ud4kb/destiny-2-how-to-get-seraph-key-codes https://www.gameskinny.com/ud4kb/destiny-2-how-to-get-seraph-key-codes Thu, 08 Dec 2022 09:17:15 -0500 John Schutt

With a new Destiny 2 season comes the obligatory set of seasonal currencies, one of the most important being Seraph Key Codes. In Season of the Seraph, Key Codes are essential to farming the limited-time weapons and armor, as you can’t open the seasonal activity chest without them. This currency is thankfully very easy to come by, and veterans of the game will be well familiar with how to acquire it. We’ll cover all of that in this guide.

How to Get Seraph Key Codes in Destiny 2 Season of the Seraph

Stop us if you’ve heard this one before: The most efficient way to earn seasonal currency is through ritual activities. Yep, the best method of earning Seraph Key Codes is by grinding Strikes, Gambit, and Crucible.

Each completion awards around 250 Key Codes, give or take 20 to 30. If your average run time is 10 minutes, that means about 1,500 Codes per hour. Faster runs will increase that value, and getting stuck with a Strike like The Corrupted will reduce it.

Here’s the catch, though: Without spending upgrades at the Exo Frame seasonal vendor, your inventory is capped at just 2,000 Key Codes at a time. You can increase that limit with the Seraph Key Code Capacity upgrade, but you can only unlock that upgrade after upgrading the Exo Frame four times, which is only possible after at least week three of Season of the Seraph.

The Exo Frame offers other ways to earn Key Codes, though many of the best ones are locked behind the seasonal time gate. Seraph Key Code Bounties, a level three upgrade, makes Exo Frame bounties award a small number of Key Codes.

The level-five Seraph Key Code Combatants upgrade gives every enemy you defeat in the world a chance at awarding a small number of Key Codes, making any activity an excellent spot to farm. However, core ritual activities will still be your optimal source.

You’ll need 500 Seraph Key Codes to open the locked Seraph Chest at the end of a Heist Battleground playlist activity, and opening said chest is one of the few ways to get Seraph Umbral Energy. You use this Energy to focus Umbral Engrams for crafting weapon Patterns and high-stat seasonal armor.

The seasonal loop, then, is:

  • Head into ritual activities to get Seraph Key Codes.
  • Play Heist Battlegrounds to earn the Umbral Energy you need at the H.E.L.M. to focus your Umbral Engrams.
  • Repeat the process until you have everything you want or feel like banging your head into a wall, whichever comes first.

That’s about everything you need to know about how to get Seraph Key Codes during Destiny 2 Season of the Seraph. With Lightfall closing in on the horizon, there will be plenty more Destiny to cover over the next year, so keep us close. Our guides hub for the game has plenty more.

]]>
Dwarf Fortress: How to Feed Animals https://www.gameskinny.com/oygui/dwarf-fortress-how-to-feed-animals https://www.gameskinny.com/oygui/dwarf-fortress-how-to-feed-animals Wed, 07 Dec 2022 17:25:30 -0500 Ashley Shankle

When you first place a Meeting Hall zone in Dwarf Fortress, you may be confused by the slowly growing number of icons above your animals' heads telling you that they're hungry. It's time to learn how to put your grazing animals to pasture to keep them fed.

Carnivorous animals are non grazing animals and won't be sated by a pasture; as you probably expect, they tend to feed themselves through meat in your stockpiles (eggs also count as meat). Herbivores, outright livestock or otherwise, can be put in a pasture and feed themselves. Once you have the zone set and it's large enough, you shouldn't have any trouble feeding grazers.

How to Place Animals in a Pasture in Dwarf Fortress

As with many things during your time with Dwarf Fortress, you'll need to play with the Zone menu to make a pasture for your grazers.

In the Zone menu, look for Pen/Pasture among the list. It's the fourth selection down in the left column with an icon of a horse.

The more animals you'll be turning loose in this zone, the larger you want it to be. The size of the herbivores will affect their appetite as well; for instance, a yak will do more plant grazing than a peacock.

You'll need a larger pasture size than you may expect, particularly for larger grazers. The Dwarf Fortress Wiki has detailed information on optimal pasture sizes per animal, with the largest being the Elephant and the smallest being the Rabbit.

You've really got to think about how much grassy space you have and which animals you can support in a pasture before going ham and deciding you want to keep them all. Having too many or too large of animals in a pasture can lead to starvation as herbivores compete for grass to graze on.

Now that you've got your pasture(s) placed, you can assign animals as necessary. This is done simply enough by selecting the pasture and clicking on the icon with a rabbit in the info tab.

Through this menu, you'll be able to add and remove grazers from a pasture as necessary.

If you want to alter the animals in a pasture you've already placed, just bring the Zone menu up again and click on the pasture to make edits.

There's more to know about the subject of feeding animals in Dwarf Fortress, but this should be enough to get you started on upkeeping your grazing animals and not watching them fall to starvation depressingly quickly. Check out our growing list of beginner guides for Dwarf Fortress here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: What are Tarot Cards? https://www.gameskinny.com/pdyad/marvels-midnight-suns-what-are-tarot-cards https://www.gameskinny.com/pdyad/marvels-midnight-suns-what-are-tarot-cards Wed, 07 Dec 2022 14:02:24 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

There are a lot of things to find hidden across the Abbey grounds in Marvel's Midnight Suns. As you start to explore the large campus in search of crafting supplies and new Havens, you'll likely end up finding a tarot card or two lying about. While the game spends plenty of time with tutorials and in-depth explanations on many of its systems, Midnight Suns doesn't go out of its way to explain the purpose of the 22 cards scattered across the Abbey.

Tarot Cards Explained

It seems like part of the reason for the overall lack of tutorial is due to the fact that, despite how heavily Midnight Suns uses cards in many of its other mechanics, there's really nothing to the tarot cards other than being a collectible. 

The art on each card is unique, depicting a different Marvel character that embodies the archetype of the card found (for example, Justice is She-Hulk, Fool is Deadpool, Moon is Moon Knight,) but other than that, nothing is gained for picking up individual cards.

If you manage to find all 22 tarot cards, however, you'll be rewarded with two things: the Salem Suit for the Hunter and Salem Savior, a rare passive ability. When activated, the passive gives you a 50% chance of drawing an additional card when taking out an enemy in combat. It's pretty useful since having more cards in your hand gives you far more options in combat, but the suit is purely cosmetic.

As mentioned above, it's a little odd that a game like Midnight Suns would include tarot cards but not lean into the card aspects of tarot reading is a little baffling, but there are plenty of other mechanics in the game to focus on. This just means that finding all 22 cards shouldn't necessarily be a priority unless the completionist in you needs to get it done as soon as you get all four words of power and gain access to the entirety of the Abbey.

That's all you need to know about what tarot cards are used for in Midnight Suns. Take a look at our other Marvel's Midnight Suns guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Dwarf Fortress: What Does Stray Animal Mean? https://www.gameskinny.com/nvjd3/dwarf-fortress-what-does-stray-animal-mean https://www.gameskinny.com/nvjd3/dwarf-fortress-what-does-stray-animal-mean Wed, 07 Dec 2022 13:57:16 -0500 Ashley Shankle

One notification that can confuse newcomers to Dwarf Fortress is one telling them that an animal is now a stray. This might be alarming due to the phrasing, but it's not necessarily a bad thing that one or some of your livestock or pets are strays. It is also something you have some semblance of control over.

When an animal is marked as a stray in Dwarf Fortress, it does not mean the animal is not domesticated and is about to turn on you. All it means is that the animal does not have an owner, which also opens them up to being butchered for materials since there is no particular sentiment about the animal among your dwarves.

How to Assign Animals as Pets in Dwarf Fortress

If an animal is domesticated and you want it to either be a productive member of dwarven society or just want to give your guys and gals some company, you can set them to be available as pets for dwarves who might want them.

To do this, open the Labor menu (the hotkey is 'y'), then click on the Creatures tab, and then the Pets/Livestock tab. From here, you can see which animals are under your wing and decide what to do with them.

The icons showing a dwarf to the right side of this menu allow you to click and toggle the creature as being available as a pet. Your dwarves should come to take them on as pets after a short time. It's worth noting that you do not want to set animals you'd like to butcher as being available as a pet. Just don't do it.

While there is more to know about this system, this guide should clarify to new players what it means when an animal is designated as a stray. Keep a look out for our growing list of Dwarf Fortress guides, such as our guide on how to get seeds.

]]>
Dwarf Fortress: Does It Have Adventure Mode on Steam? https://www.gameskinny.com/eyai1/dwarf-fortress-does-it-have-adventure-mode-on-steam https://www.gameskinny.com/eyai1/dwarf-fortress-does-it-have-adventure-mode-on-steam Wed, 07 Dec 2022 13:54:25 -0500 Ashley Shankle

Dwarf Fortress has endless gameplay possibilites packed into its Fortress mode  and it certainly has plenty of nerdy features and informational tidbits in Legends mode  but Adventure mode is where the roguelike fans on Steam want to roam.

Adventure mode allows you to make a character, or even a party, to explore a generated world rife with threats both large and small, inevitably ending in death (as is the proper roguelike way). The mode provides a totally different perspective, and the gameplay is a totally different beast from Dwarf Fortress' more notorious Fortress mode, allowing you to explore and experience the worlds you generate in a more RPG manner.

Is Adventure Mode in Dwarf Fortress on Steam?

At the time of writing, Steam's Dwarf Fortress build does not include Adventure mode. Adventure mode is currently in development for the Steam build of the game; it not launching with the Steam release is likely due to the number of interface changes between the original, free version and the more modernized Steam one.

According to a blog post from October, we can expect to see Adventure mode added to the game around the time it receives achievements on Steam. Hopefully, both should happen in the next few months.

Don't wait for Adventure mode to hop into Dwarf Fortress, though: the game's depth is second to none. Fortress mode is as robust as a management game can get, as expected from one of the most influential games in the genre. If you're coming into the game fresh with the Steam release, consider taking a gander at our growing list of Dwarf Fortress guides, including how to get seeds and what it means when an animal is stray.

]]>
Marvel's Midnight Suns: All Playable Characters https://www.gameskinny.com/q1slf/marvels-midnight-suns-all-playable-characters https://www.gameskinny.com/q1slf/marvels-midnight-suns-all-playable-characters Wed, 07 Dec 2022 13:54:14 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

There are literally thousands of Marvel characters that appear in comics, movies, video games, and more, so when creating a cast of characters for Marvel's Midnight Suns, the studio behind the game, Firaxis, had its work cut out for it in choosing and balancing playable characters.

Given the sheer number of Marvel characters, there was no way that Midnight Suns would be able to host them all, so instead, the game focuses on twelve unlockable heroes.

All Marvel's Midnight Suns Playable Characters

The superheroes included in Midnight Suns are as follows:

  • Blade
  • Captain America
  • Captain Marvel
  • Doctor Strange
  • Ghost Rider
  • Hulk
  • Iron Man
  • Magik
  • Nico Minoru
  • Scarlet Witch
  • Spider-Man
  • Wolverine

When you start the game, you'll only have a handful of characters unlocked, but as you progress through the main story, more heroes will start appearing around the Abbey for you to hang out with and use in battle. In addition to the twelve heroes listed above, you have access to the Hunter, the new, playable character introduced exclusively for Midnight Suns.

At the start of the game, you'll have access to Blade, Captain Marvel, Doctor Strange, Ghost Rider, Iron Man, Magik, Nico Minoru, and the Hunter. 

There are four DLC characters that will be added to the game at a later date. There isn't any official confirmation as to when specifically they'll go live, but according to the Midnight Suns Season Pass, it'll be in "early 2023." Those characters are as follows:

  • Deadpool
  • Morbius
  • Storm
  • Venom

Although there's plenty of free DLC that gets released for major titles nowadays, the Midnight Suns Season Pass costs $50. That means that if you're looking to expand the game's roster and gain extra story content, you'll need to pay for it.

The playable character roster for Midnight Suns is set to grow in time, but it's pretty healthy as it stands. In the meantime, check out some of our Marvel's Midnight Suns guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Dwarf Fortress: How to Get Seeds https://www.gameskinny.com/m7svu/dwarf-fortress-how-to-get-seeds https://www.gameskinny.com/m7svu/dwarf-fortress-how-to-get-seeds Wed, 07 Dec 2022 13:12:51 -0500 Ashley Shankle

There's an ocean of things to learn to play Dwarf Fortress effectively, but you don't have to learn them all at once. Even things that should be relatively simple, like farming, can be complex matters for new players. Your first step toward farming is figuring out how to get seeds.

Plant growth is seasonal in Dwarf Fortress. There are four seasons total, and each season has three months. Each month is 28 days. For quick reference, here are the seasons and the months that fall within them so you don't sow your seeds at the tail-end of a season and find yourself out of luck with yields.

  • Spring — Granite, Slate, and Felsite
  • Summer — Hematite, Malachite, and Galena
  • Autumn — Limestone, Sandstone, and Timber
  • Winter — Moonstone, Opal, and Obsidian

You can see the date at the top of the game's HUD, to the right.

How to Get Seeds in Dwarf Fortress

The first step to getting seeds is to harvest wild plants through plant gathering, which is easy enough to do over a large swath of land. Unfortunately, this often doesn't grant enough seasonal seeds to really get started farming, meaning you'll need to take to processing to get more.

Seeds are stored in bags, so you'll want to have a few of those on hand before starting this process. Bags can be most easily made via a Clothier's Shop, which is found under Build -> Workshops -> Clothing and leather -> Clothes.

Once you have some empty bags, it's time to get started processing the plants your dwarves gathered to gain the seeds within.

There are five primary methods of obtaining seeds:

  1. Brewing drinks at a Still — You should have a Still already since it was likely one of your earliest Workshops. Brewing drinks using fruit or plants can grant seeds once the task is complete. You need Barrels to brew drinks, and they can be crafted at the Carpenter's Workshop.
  2. Milling plants using a Millstone or Quern — These Workshops grind plants into powdery sugar, flour, or dye; and, of course, give seeds. You'll use a Quern for this early on, which requires the Quern item made at a Stoneworker's Workshop first. The Quern Workshop can be found under Build -> Workshops -> Farming -> Quern.
  3. Letting dwarves eat uncooked plants/fruit — This will just sort of happen. It's not a reliable source of seeds, but it is worth knowing.
  4. Processing plants at a Farmer's Workshop — You've got a few options at the Farmer's Workshop (Build -> Workshops -> Farming -> Farmer), and the regular "Process plants" tasks is the one you want to focus on. This refines plants like cotton, jute, pig tails, and so on into thread, which grants their seeds on completion.
  5. Trade — On the rare occasions that trade representatives visit, you should be able to purchase seeds. Be mindful of the season when purchasing. While this is the less self-sustaining option, it will do in a pinch.

With all this information in mind, you should be able to get your Farm Plots sewn with seasonal seeds. It takes a little effort initially to get seeds, but it's worth taking the time to learn how to gain them yourself without having to rely on trading. We've got more Dwarf Fortress guides coming, so stay tuned.

]]>
The Callisto Protocol: How Long Does it Take to Beat? https://www.gameskinny.com/avbbl/the-callisto-protocol-how-long-does-it-take-to-beat https://www.gameskinny.com/avbbl/the-callisto-protocol-how-long-does-it-take-to-beat Tue, 06 Dec 2022 16:29:49 -0500 Bryn Gelbart

The Callisto Protocol is the latest AAA survival horror game on the market. Set on a prison on the moon Callisto, this space horror title comes from Dead Space creative director Glen Schofield and his new team at Striking Distance Studios.

In the vein of its predecessors, The Callisto Protocol is a short and relatively focused game. It won't take you dozens of hours like a giant RPG. Fans of the genre should generally understand what hour range these games can fall into, but where exactly does The Callisto Protocol land on that spectrum?

How Long is The Callisto Protocol?

My playtime for our The Callisto Protocol review clocked in a little over 7 hours, probably closer to 8 hours when you count all the deaths. Another GameSkinny writer came in at about 9 hours. So there's a bit of variation depending on a player's skill level and the chosen difficulty setting.

This playtime is pretty similar to the averages for the first two Dead Space titles. As far as more contemporary action horror games go, The Callisto Protocol is about on par with Resident Evil: Village and falls within the range it took most players to finish Resident Evil 2

It's worth noting that unlike many of these games, The Callisto Protocol does not have a New Game Plus feature yet, but it is scheduled to be patched in next year.

If you want to know more about The Callisto Protocol, check out our guides for The Callisto Protocol for more walkthroughs and tips. There you can find comprehensive guides like our list of all the weapons and where to find all audio logs and bios.

]]>
The Callisto Protocol: How to Dodge https://www.gameskinny.com/icw9f/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-dodge https://www.gameskinny.com/icw9f/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-dodge Tue, 06 Dec 2022 16:11:26 -0500 Bryn Gelbart

The first combat maneuver you learn in The Callisto Protocol is the dodge. Unlike the space horror game's predecessor's like Dead Space and Resident Evil 4 before that, The Callisto Protocol places an emphasis on melee combat. Knowing how to dodge and block enemy attacks is paramount to getting through the game without a boat load of frustration. 

Mastering the dodging and blocking mechanics will make the game, especially the trickier early hours, much easier. While The Callisto Protocol overwhelms you with tutorial tool tips, the wording of these has created uncertainty. In this guide we will explain exactly how the dodging mechanics work. You will learn how to perfectly dodge and block your opponents attacks. 

How to Perfectly Dodge and Block in The Callisto Protocol

The way dodging works in The Callisto Protocol is a little unusual. As long as you are holding the left stick to either the left or right (it doesn't matter which initially) you will dodge any incoming move from enemies facing you. Note that you can still get hit from the back

As long as you are holding left or right when you see an incoming attack, you will dodge it perfectly.

If you hold backward, as in pulling the left stick towards you when an enemy swings at you, then you will block. Blocks do not avoid damage completely the way dodges do. Blocking will reduce a significant amount of damage, but it will also leave enemies open for counterattacks. 

The other trick to dodging in The Callisto Protocol is learning how to chain dodges together. The tutorial explains this as well, but put more simply you must dodge consecutive incoming attacks in alternating directions.

If you start by blocking to the right and the enemy immediately follows up with another swing, you will need to block left. Later in the game you will need to alternate back and forth multiple times to avoid the attacks of powerful creatures and bosses. 

That is everything there is to know about dodging in The Callisto Protocol. It will take a little while to get a hang of, but once you understand the basics those skills will get you through the rest of the game. If you need to know anything else about the game, take a look at our other The Callisto Protocol guides such as how to increase inventory space or how to get all Data Bios and Audio Logs.

]]>
How Many Chapters are in The Callisto Protocol? https://www.gameskinny.com/stavj/how-many-chapters-are-in-the-callisto-protocol https://www.gameskinny.com/stavj/how-many-chapters-are-in-the-callisto-protocol Tue, 06 Dec 2022 15:08:07 -0500 Bryn Gelbart

The Callisto Protocol is not a particularly long game. However, the latest survival horror action game doesn't make it easy to track your progress or guess how far you have progressed in the story. If you're considering picking up the game or just started, here is all you need to know about how many chapters are in The Callisto Protocol and about how long it will take to beat them.

There are 8 chapters between you and The Callisto Protocol's credits. The first chapter only takes a short bit to complete, but soon, you'll realize the bulk of the chapters are of greater lengths. Most are separated by cutscenes and title cards that flash chapter name's across the screen, though the game doesn't label the chapters by numbers. 

Here are the names and the order of The Callisto Protocol's chapters. 

  • Chapter 1: Cargo.
  • Chapter 2: Outbreak.
  • Chapter 3: Aftermath.
  • Chapter 4: Habitat.
  • Chapter 5: Lost.
  • Chapter 6: Below.
  • Chapter 7: Colony.
  • Chapter 8: Tower.

After the shorter first two chapters, the rest of the chapters in the game will run you at least an hour, if not closer to two if you die a lot, which you just might, considering the game's combat system!  

That is all there is to know about how many chapters are in The Callisto Protocol. Check out our review if you haven't picked up the game just yet, or how to get all weapons if you've just started. For more information and guides on The Callisto Protocol, visit our dedicated hub page for the title.

]]>
Is Deadpool in Marvel's Midnight Suns? https://www.gameskinny.com/xar8a/is-deadpool-in-marvels-midnight-suns https://www.gameskinny.com/xar8a/is-deadpool-in-marvels-midnight-suns Tue, 06 Dec 2022 13:54:31 -0500 Peter Hunt Szpytek

Marvel's Midnight Suns offers plenty of classic caped characters to choose from as you build your teams in preparation for its XCOM-style turn-based battles. With hundreds of beloved Marvel characters to choose from, however, not every fan favorite was able to make the cut for the game's roster, and there are some notable omissions. So, can is Deadpool in the game?

Unfortunately, despite his extreme popularity among Marvel fans, Deadpool isn't in the base game. Fortunately, Deadpool will be added to Marvel's Midnight Suns later down the line as DLC content. While it's certainly disappointing for fans who were excited to spend some quality time with the Merc with a Mouth in one of the game's many hangout spots, it's at least good to know that he'll make it to the game eventually.

We don't know when specifically Deadpool will be coming to the game other than the vague "early 2023" window provided during the announcement trailer. Along with Storm, Morbius, and Venom, Deadpool is part of Midnight Suns' season pass, which adds the four new characters, additional story content for each character, and 23 premium skins for the existing lineup.

It's worth pointing out that Deadpool and the rest of the season pass cost an additional $50 on top of the base game's price. Developer Firaxis assures that the additional content associated with Deadpool and the other DLC characters will be well worth the cost as the stories will be more focused on the new characters instead of being sidelined in favor of the game's overarching plot.

It also appears that you won't be able to purchase Midnight Suns' DLC characters individually, meaning that if you want to add Deadpool to the collection of heroes hanging around the Abbey, you'll need to pay for the rest of the DLC as well.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Best Enchantments https://www.gameskinny.com/g559s/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-enchantments https://www.gameskinny.com/g559s/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-enchantments Tue, 06 Dec 2022 09:13:36 -0500 Sergey_3847

You can equip various enchantments in God of War: Ragnarok to improve your stats and abilities. The best enchantments are the ones that come in sets since they have special perks, but there are also some individual enchantments that are worth looking at.

Our guide will provide you with a list of the best enchantments in God of War: Ragnarok, including tips on how to get them.

Asgard Enchantments

The best set of enchantments for increasing heavy damage and all the damage that comes from Kratos' abilities would be the Asgard's set.

The three best Asgard enchantments are:

  • Asgard's Fortitude
    • Strength: 12
    • Cooldown: 3
  • Asgard's Justice
    • Cooldown: 3
    • Luck: 12
  • Asgard's Might
    • Defense: 12
    • Cooldown: 3

Note that once all three enchantments are equipped, they will activate the Asgard's special perk, which increases the damage of all heavy attacks and abilities, based on Kratos' Cooldown.

How to get Asgard Enchantments

Asgard's Fortitude can be obtained after defeating Hardrefill the Callous optional berserker boss, who can be found at the city of Nidavellir in Svartalfheim (indicated on the map above). Players may encounter him during "Fit for a King" favor.

Asgard's Justice can be obtained as a part of "A Scar Is Born" buried treasure, which can be found in The Sinkholes of Vanaheim.

Asgard's Might can be obtained after defeating Beirgadr the Feared berserker boss at the Alberich Island of Svartalfheim. Players can fight him right after they collect the Hilt of Skofnung at the spot indicated on the map above.

Vanaheim Enchantments

If you want to focus on increasing melee damage and negative status effects, then Vanaheim set would be the best choice.

The three best Vanaheim enchantments are:

  • Vanaheim's Fortitude.
    • Cooldown: 20
    • Luck: 2
  • Vanaheim's Honor.
    • Runic: 8
    • Luck: 5
  • Vanaheim's Virtue.
    • Strength: 9
    • Luck: 4

When all three enchantments are equipped, players will receive a special set perk allowing Kratos to deal more melee damage to enemies affected by negative status effects. This chance depends on the overall level of your Luck.

How to get Vanaheim Enchantments

Vanaheim's Fortitude can be obtained right after players complete the "For Vanaheim!" favor, which requires them to locate and rescue Birgir. You can find Birgir at The Sinkholes of Vanaheim.

Vanaheim's Honor can be crafted at any workshop for 1,000 Hacksilver.

Vanaheim's Virtue becomes available as a reward right after players complete the twelfth story mission "Reunion".

Greater Regenerating Essence Enchantment

Dealing damage is one of the main priorities in God of War: Ragnarok, but one also needs to find a way to quickly restore Kratos' health.

Greater Regenerating Essence is the best healing enchantment in the game, albeit you can equip it only in case you already have at least 170 Vitality.

How to get Greater Regenerating Essence

Greater Regenerating Essence can be obtained after defeating the Slag Horn dragon during the "Path of Destruction: The Jungle" quest in The Jungle of Vanaheim.

Evasive Cleanse Enchantment

Negative status effects can create a lot of problems for Kratos if he doesn't get rid of them soon enough.

Evasive Cleanse enchantment provides players with an ability to remove various negative status effects, such as Burn, Poison, and Frost, by simply dodge rolling.

In order to equip this enchantment players must have at least 130 Defense.

How to get Evasive Cleanse Enchantment

In order to get Evasive Cleanse enchantment players need to raid one of the four possible Kol Raider camps in Midgard:

  • In the Raider Hideout.
  • In the Raider Stronghold.
  • In the Raider Fort.
  • In the ice cave north of the Raider's Keep.

Stunning Fang Enchantment

Lastly is an enchantment that provides that extra push to all your attacks, especially the ones with the Stun damage.

Stunning Fang enchantment will release a series of shockwaves once you hit a stunned enemy. On top of that, there is a chance of further stacking your Strength, as well as Stun damage.

Only players who have at least 220 Defense can equip Stunning Fang.

How to get Stunning Fang Enchantment

During the "Casualty of War: The Scroll" favor given by the spirit of Vanaheim players have to find the other half of the scroll, and as a reward they will receive the Stunning Fang enchantment.

The required scroll can be found in The Plains of Vanaheim indicated on the map above.

Those are the best enchantments in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
The Callisto Protocol: What are Energy Converters For? https://www.gameskinny.com/v39d5/the-callisto-protocol-what-are-energy-converters-for https://www.gameskinny.com/v39d5/the-callisto-protocol-what-are-energy-converters-for Mon, 05 Dec 2022 15:22:25 -0500 Jonathan Moore

As you make your way through The Callisto Protocol, you'll come across a number of items that have pretty obvious uses. Callisto Credits, for example, are used at the Reforge shops dotted around Black Iron prison and the surrounding areas, turned in to buy ammo, health packs, and weapon upgrades. However, you may be wondering what the heck Energy Converters do. 

Energy Converters sound like they have a neat, sci-fi horror application in this Dead Space-adjacent title, but they're simply used to get more Callisto Credits at Reforgers. You'll quickly find that scouring lockers, desks, and dead zombies for Credits can be a (necessary) slog, but Energy Converters often give you a quick influx of cash. 

There are several varieties of Energy Converters with different monetary values, though each looks like a little tank in your inventory: 

  • Energy Converter (common): 100 credits.
  • Pristine Energy Converter (rare): 200 credits.

These items can be found everywhere in The Callisto Protocol. Sometimes they're found on crates, other times in lockers, and others still in the many lockboxes peppered throughout the game. Always take the opportunity to look for them and grab as many as your inventory space will allow. Indeed, try as much as you can to pick them up and sell them immediately to pick up more as you find them. 

You'll also want to keep an eye out for other rare items that give you Callisto Credits, such as:

  • Decoders: 500 credits.
  • Pristine Decoders: 750 credits. 
  • CPU Printers: 1,000 credits. 

Now that you know what Energy Converters are for, head over to our complete collectibles guide to find all of The Callisto Protocol's audio logs and data bios, or head over to our weapons guide to find all of their locations. 

]]>
The Callisto Protocol: How to Increase Inventory Space https://www.gameskinny.com/hvklu/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-increase-inventory-space https://www.gameskinny.com/hvklu/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-increase-inventory-space Mon, 05 Dec 2022 15:00:36 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Much like other survival horror games, The Callisto Protocol puts inventory space at a premium. Some of the game's scariest moments come when you're forced to pick and choose which items to carry further into Black Iron Prison and its surrounding habitat areas — and which to leave behind completely. As you're playing through the first several chapters, you may be wondering how to increase inventory space to carry more. 

When you begin The Callisto Protocol, you'll have six inventory spaces for items like energy converters, ammo, and health packs. Found on the right side of the Inventory Menu under the Items label, this space does not include weapons. Instead, weapons are stored in a separate, non-upgradeable area labeled Arsenal on the left side of the Inventory Menu. Likewise, important story items like gate fuses do not take up item inventory space. 

To increase inventory space, you'll need to make it to the end of Chapter 4: Habitat and the beginning of Chapter 5: Lost. Here, during a cutscene bridging the two chapters, you'll gain access to the space suit seen in all of The Callisto Protocol's trailers and marketing. This space suit increases your inventory space from 6 slots to the maximum of 12 slots.

Unlike printing and upgrading weapons at the Reforger, you do not have to do anything else to get more inventory slots. 

And that's all you need to know about increasing and upgrading your inventory in The Callisto Protocol. If you're on the hunt for all of the game's collectibles, head over to our audio log and data bios guide. If you're wondering how to get all of the weapons (because you're definitely going to want the Riot Gun and Assault Rifle for the game's final chapters), we have a complete locations guide right here. We also explain what Energy Converters are for

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Gale Flame Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/myto6/god-of-war-ragnarok-gale-flame-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/myto6/god-of-war-ragnarok-gale-flame-locations Mon, 05 Dec 2022 13:41:03 -0500 Sergey_3847

Each weapon in God of War: Ragnarok is associated with its own upgrade material, and the Draupnir Spear is no exception, using Gale Flames to become more powerful and useful. You will get the Draupnir Spear during the game's sixth story mission, Forging Destiny. Aside from being another part of your arsenal, the spear also helps you reach areas previously locked for exploration.

To upgrade the Draupnir Spear to Level 9, its maximum level, you will need to collect all four Gale Flames. This guide will tell you where to find all of the Gale Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok.

Gale Flame Location #1

The first Gale Flame can be obtained during "The Spark of the World" objective in the 16th story mission "The Summoning". You will encounter the Hrist & Mist boss at Burning Cliffs in Muspelheim. Once the boss is defeated, he will drop your first Gale Flame.

Gale Flame Location #2

Your next target is one of Ragnarok's Berserker Gravestones; this specific Gravestone is found in Jarnsmida Pitmines in Svartalfheim. The easiest way to get there is via Aurvangar Wetlands, and then through Sverd Sands and The Applecore.

Once the Berserker spirit has been defeated, it will drop your second Gale Flame as a reward.

Gale Flame Location #3

To get the next Gale Flame, you will have to complete the "Nocturnal Predator" favor. Travel to The Plains in Vanaheim and collect the three Wisps at the location indicated on the map above. Once they're gathered, interact with the sigil in the middle and defeat the Flame Phantom boss, who drops the third Gale Flame.

Gale Flame Location #4

If you want to maximize your Draupnir Spear fully, you can collect the fourth Gale Flame once you capture all six Lindwyrms. These creatures appear out of portals indicated on the maps below. As soon as you capture the last Lindwyrm, you will be rewarded with the final Gale Flame.

For portals to appear, you need to start the "Lost Lindwyrms" favor, which can be initiated after completing the ninth story mission, "The Word of Fate". Travel to the Sindri's House, and speak to Ratatoskr, who will ask you to bring those creatures back.

Lindwyrm Location #1

Go to the Myrkr Tunnels in Svartalfheim, and sit inside a minecart that will take you to The Forge indicated on the map above. You will see the first portal on top of the cliff right above the passage in the rocks.

Lindwyrm Location #2

Arrive at the eastern pier of the Bay of Bounty, and use the bridge structures to enter Alberich Hollow in Svartalfheim. There, you have to defeat the Ormstunga mini-boss and enter the cave at the end of the path, indicated on the map above. The second portal is inside that cave.

Lindwyrm Location #3

Take your boat to the docks of Alberich Island in the northern portion of Svartalfheim. Climb the hill to your right, and use the wooden platform to jump onto the barge in front of you, which contains the third portal.

Lindwyrm Location #4

Use the same pathway to reach The Applecore in Svartalfheim, as when you've been obtaining the second Gale Flame.

Enter the tunnel indicated on the map above, and follow the path until you reach a spot where a pop-up appears on the screen informing you of "A Mystic Gateway". Then, turn left, and you should see the fourth portal.

Lindwyrm Location #5

To unlock the last two portals, you must first complete the "Scent of Survival" favor, which is available right after the 13th story mission, "Creatures of Prophecy". Once you arrive at The Crater in Vanaheim, head over to the spot indicated on the map for the fifth portal.

Lindwyrm Location #6

Finally, travel to the very edge of the cliff in the northwest of The Sinkholes in Vanaheim indicated on the map above, and capture the sixth Lindwyrm.

After that, go back to Sindri's House and speak to Ratatoskr, who will reward you with 4,500 XP for Kratos and 1,125 XP for Freya, as well as the last Gale Flame.

Those are all Gale Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
The Callisto Protocol: How to Get All Weapons https://www.gameskinny.com/h43yv/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-get-all-weapons https://www.gameskinny.com/h43yv/the-callisto-protocol-how-to-get-all-weapons Mon, 05 Dec 2022 11:02:50 -0500 Bryn Gelbart

Each weapon you get in The Callisto Protocol is crucial to navigating Black Iron prison and surviving the game's monsters. Rooted in survival horror, The Callisto Protocol limits the number of weapons you get, giving each of them a specific purpose and function. 

While you only wind up getting five guns in The Callisto Protocol, melee and other weapon types are just as important in combat. All in all, you get to try a number of different tools for disposing of the aliens on Callisto. 

Thankfully, the game gives you a majority of the weapons on the critical path. However, there are a handful of guns that you will need to go out of your way to find the schematics for. In order to access these weapons, you will need to find their schematic in the level, return it to a Refroger/shop access point, and then purchase the weapon from the store. For each one of those, we will let you know exactly where the schematics are located and how much the weapons will cost you in Callisto Credits. 

All Weapons in Callisto Protocol

How to Get the Shiv

The Shiv is the first weapon you get in The Callisto Protocol. Once you get the Shiv, you will be able to open loot crates, cut into terminals to enter previously inaccessible areas, and — later in the game — use it to stealth kill enemies.

The Shiv unmissable. You get it as part of the story during the very early parts of Chapter 2.

How to Get the Crowbar 

The Crowbar is the second weapon you’ll get in the game. Unlike all the other weapons, you only have access to this one for a temporary period of time period before its replaced by the Stun Baton. 

The crowbar is found in Chapter 2, a short time after you pick up the Shiv. After crossing a bridge and opening a locked door, you’ll have your first scripted combat encounter, receiving this weapon in the process.

How to Get the Stun Baton

The Stun Baton is a crucial weapon, as it will be your melee companion for the rest of the game. Like all the other weapons so far, you get the Stun Baton by simply moving forward in the critical path. 

You’ll pick the Stun Baton up automatically once reaching the Weapons Lockup in Chapter 2. This weapon replaces the Crowbar. 

How to Get the BI-55 Pistol Hand Cannon

You’ll be able to print the Hand Cannon when you first get access to the Reforge and weapon shop. After a brief cutscene, you will be able to go to the Reforge. First, though, pick up the 800 Callisto Credits to your right that will help you pay for the Hand Cannon. 

You then have to create the pistol and purchase it for 800 Callisto Credits — which you will now have at bare minimum. Crafting your first weapon will also earn you the Paper Jams trophy/achievement.

How to Get the GRP (Gravity Restraint Projector)

Like its spiritual predecessor Dead SpaceThe Callisto Protocol gives you a telekinesis-like ability that allows you to grab enemies and objects. You’ll get the GRP (Gravity Restraint Projector) about halfway or so through Chapter 3 on the critical path. You can’t miss it.

After running through the Laundry and the maintenance areas, you’ll go through a QTE door to enter a MedLab area with flickering lights, stretchers, and a path that curves left. Follow the path to the end and squeeze through a door on the left to pick the GRP off the floor near the body of a dead guard on a stretcher.

How to Get the Skunk Gun Shotgun (Schematic)

The first schematic you have to find in The Callisto Protocol is located in Chapter 4: Habitat. This missable blueprint will give you early access to a shotgun, which will be a useful friend in the game's tough middle hours. 

Once you reach The Habitat Dome and Oxygen Processing, specifically, go through the door labeled Botanical H624. Follow the path all the way to the end, and go into the door labeled Utility Hall H626 — this will be marked by the 02 Botanical Recycling sign hanging from the ceiling. Go up the stairs, turn right, and squeeze through the gap in the wall. The schematic is located on a crate on the right side, near a data bios.

Once you return it to the nearest reforger, the Skunk Gun shotgun costs 800 credits to craft. 

How to Get the TK4 Riot Shotgun (Riot Gun)

The Riot Gun is a shotgun that is a marked improvement over the Skunk Gun. Arguably, it's the best weapon in the game. Thankfully, The Callisto Protocol is nice for once and just gives it to you in Chapter 5. 

About halfway through the chapter, after making it to the garage, you will receive the Riot Gun as part of the main story. 

How to Get the UJC Special Ops Tactical Pistol (Schematic)

You’ll find the schematic for the Tactical Pistol in Chapter 6, after you’ve fallen down the elevator shaft. Go forward through the area with the blind zombies roaming about until you have to squeeze through a tight space with two blind zombies on either side. They will awaken and attack you. Defeat them, and then go into the side area to the right. You can pick up the schematic from on top of the table near the lockers.

This weapon costs 600 credits to print. It is more precise than the Hand Cannon but, especially at first, it won't do nearly as much damage. The Tactical Pistol can be good for taking out limbs, but it isn't a powerhouse like many of the other options. 

How to Get the Assault Rifle (Schematic)

The final weapon you pick up in The Callisto Protocol is the Assault Rifle. You can find this machine gun in the early portion of Chapter 7. This is fairly late in the game, considering there are only 8 chapters that will take you anywhere between 8 and 12 hours.

After entering the colony itself and talking to Dani about the light tower, you’ll take a ladder down into a shanty town area full of blind zombies. At the back of the area is an elevator you can’t use yet. To the right of the elevator is a building with a ladder and a Midtown sign on it. Take the ladder up, then turn around and go behind the ladder. Go through the General Store, and turn left. You’ll see a small bathroom building with L2 written on it. The schematic is on the sink.

When you run this back to a shop, you will be able to print it and acquire the Assault Rifle. This weapon costs 1,000 credits to print. That might seem like a hefty fee, but trust us, it is crucial to have this weapon to make it through the grueling final hours of The Callisto Protocol

That's it. Those are the only weapons in The Callisto Protocol. There are no special hidden weapons nor reward weapons for finishing the game, as is tradition for survival horror. For more tips, check out our other Callisto Protocol guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Best Pokemon for Tera Raids https://www.gameskinny.com/skzz2/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-pokemon-for-tera-raids https://www.gameskinny.com/skzz2/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-pokemon-for-tera-raids Mon, 05 Dec 2022 10:23:10 -0500 Sergey_3847

Synergy of moves and abilities is the foundation of the new Tera Raid battle format in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Players can catch wild Pokemon and Terastallize them, thus increasing their stats for more effective team work against the enemy Pokemon.

Our guide will provide you with a list of the best Pokemon for Tera Raids in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. You will learn which moves and abilities are the best, as well as gain knowledge on how to catch these Pokemon.

Best Pokemon for Tera Raids

Iron Hands

  • Role: Physical Attacker.

Iron Hands Pokemon with the Fighting tera type is the strongest attacker in the game right now. Players can find and catch this particular type at Area Zero.

If you want Iron Hands to deal even more damage, then change its nature to Adamant, using Adamant Mint if the one you've caught had a different nature.

His best moves are Belly Drum, which increases his attack by six stages, and Drain Punch, which also heals you while dealing further damage.

Iron Hand's best ability is Quark Drive, which boosts any of your highest stat by another 30%.

Miraidon

  • Role: Special Attacker.

Although Miraidon has some very strong physical attacks, this Pokemon would be best used in Tera Raids as a Special Attacker with Electric Tera type due to the nature of its moves.

Miraidon's best moves are Electro Drift and Dragon Pulse for pure damage, but it is also recommended to use Metal Sound to debuff enemy's special defenses.

Players automatically obtain Miraidon as soon as they complete the game. But you can also catch the second one in The Great Crater of Paldea. This second one will have the Modest nature, which is more suitable for Tera Raids.

Grimmsnarl

  • Role: Support.

A perfect support Pokemon is the one who can taunt enemies and deflect their damage, as well as heal all the allies and have immunity from certain types of Pokemon. Grimmsnarl combines all those elements!

Taunting prevents enemy Pokemon from using their status moves, and such moves like Reflect and Light Screen protect you from incoming damage. After that, use Heal Up to restore your team's HP.

The most suitable Tera type for Grimmsnarl would be Fairy, as it grants him immunity from Dragon types. You will need to catch Impidimp at Tagtree Thicket, and level it up to Level 42, as that's when it automatically evolves into Grimmsnarl.

Koraidon

  • Role: Physical Attacker.

Koraidon combines the moves of both Iron Hand and Miraidon, with the main focus on physical damage with its Fighting Tera type.

The best offensive moves are Collision Course and Fire Fang, but you can also use Screech to debuff your enemy's defenses by the whole two stages.

Just like in the case with Miraidon, players can catch two Koraidon Pokemon. The first one becomes available right after the game is completed, and the second one can be caught in The Great Crater of Paldea.

Flutter Mane

  • Role: Special Attacker.

This Fairy Pokemon may not look formidable, but its strength is hidden in the special combo that increases its special attacks to truly formidable levels. The mentioned combo involves Protosynthesis ability and Booster Energy held item.

Once it is Terastallized your best move will be Moonblast, which deals massive damage to Dragon, Fighting, and Dark types with 100% accuracy. Also, use Shadow Ball to protect yourself from Ghost types and Mystical Fire against Steel types.

Players can catch Flutter Mane at Research Station 4 in Area Zero, or by trading or playing co-op with other players who own Pokemon Scarlet, if you have Pokemon Violet yourself.

Gardevoir

  • Role: Support.

Gardevoir is very similar in its playstyle to Grimmsnarl with a few notable exceptions.

They both share the Fairy tera type, which makes them immune to Dragon types, and have Reflect and Light Screen moves to deflect enemy attacks, but Gardevoir also has an attack boosting move Helping Hand, which is excellent for supporting your attackers.

In case you want to heal your team, then use Life Dew, but most importantly, use your Synchronize ability to deflect an enemy's own negative status effect.

Gardevoir evolves from Kirlia once it has reached Level 30. You can catch Kirlia around lighthouses in Port Miranda and Levincia.

Those are the best Pokemon for Tera Raids in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. For more Pokemon Scarlet and Violet tips and tricks articles, head over to our dedicated guides hub.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Nature Mints Guide — How to Get and Use Them and What They Do https://www.gameskinny.com/qrruo/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-nature-mints-guide-how-to-get-and-use-them-and-what-they-do https://www.gameskinny.com/qrruo/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-nature-mints-guide-how-to-get-and-use-them-and-what-they-do Mon, 05 Dec 2022 10:18:33 -0500 John Schutt

Natures are one of the core mechanics in the Pokemon games, and they return in Scarlet and Violet. They're the most clear-cut way to know how your team's stats will increase. Almost every nature is a flat increase to one stat's growth rate while cutting another, and to make the most of the system you'll need to get used to Nature Mints.

There are 25 natures total, but only twenty of them actually affect stats. Quirky, Bashful, Docile, and Serious allow all stats to grow equally. To add to the complexity, Serious has a Nature Mint associated with it, which we'll get into below. Here's everything you need to know about Nature Mints in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

Nature Mints Guide for Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

You can find Nature Mints in the world of Paldea, but your best source is the Chansey Supply shops scattered around the world. The easiest of those to reach is the one in eastern Mesagoza.

Note that you won't have access to any Mints when you first start the game, and you won't have the complete list until late, as they don't become available in shops until you beat the sixth Gym.

That scarcity means you're better off waiting until after you've beaten at least all eight Gyms, and possibly the Elite Four and Champion, just to be sure you can buy any of the ones you need. Natures are most important for endgame Tera Raid preparation, and while they're certainly helpful during the main story, they aren't necessary.

Nature Mints are also incredibly expensive: 20,000 Poke Dollars for a single Mint.

Nature Mints and What They Do
  • Adamant Mint: Attack up, Special Attack down.
  • Bold Mint: Defense up, Attack down.
  • Brave Mint: Attack up, Speed, down.
  • Calm Mint: Special Defense up, Attack down.
  • Careful Mint: Special Defense up, Special Attack down.
  • Gentle Mint: Special Defense up, Defense down.
  • Hasty Mint: Speed up, Defense down.
  • Impish Mint: Defense up, Special Attack down.
  • Jolly Mint: Speed Up, Special Attack down.
  • Lax Mint: Defense up, Special Defense down.
  • Lonely Mint: Attack up, Defense down.
  • Mild Mint: Special Attack up, Defense, down.
  • Modest Mint: Special Attack up, Attack down.
  • Naive Mint: Speed up, Special Defense down.
  • Naughty Mint: Attack up, Special Defense down.
  • Quiet Mint: Special Attack up, Speed down.
  • Rash Mint: Special Attack up, Special Defense down.
  • Relaxed Mint: Defense up, Speed down
  • Sassy Mint: Special Defense up, Speed down.
  • Serious Mint: All grow evenly, a little better.
  • Timid Mint: Speed up, Attack Down.

Using Nature Mints is like using any other item. Head to the Other Items tab in your Bag, scroll down to the Mint you want to use and choose the Pokemon you want to use it on.

You'll get a notice that the stats might change, but you want that, so use the Mint. Be aware that the nature in the Check Summary page might not change, but the Pokemon's stats will.

Whether this is a bug or is intended for some reason, using a Mint is successful either way. That's about everything you need to know about Nature Mints in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. If you plan on taking on 6-star Tera Raid Battles, you'll want to optimize your team's Natures, on top of many other factors.

To earn the right to buy Nature Mints, you should follow our best Gym order guide, and knowing how to raise friendship will also be helpful. Our Scarlet and Violet guides hub has more.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Full TM List https://www.gameskinny.com/nja9s/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-full-tm-list https://www.gameskinny.com/nja9s/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-full-tm-list Mon, 05 Dec 2022 10:14:43 -0500 John Schutt

Pokemon Scarlet and Violet is a big game, and while it does have every Pokemon in the National Pokedex, it does have 171 Technical Machines to teach your team different moves.

You can craft all of them using the even more numerous Pokemon crafting materials, but today, we’re listing every TM you can find, buy, or craft in the latest entry in the Pokemon franchise.

The Full TM List in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

With 171 total TMs in Scarlet and Violet, getting through the list will take a little time. We recommend the search function.

  • TM 001: Take Down
  • TM 002: Charm
  • TM 003: Fake Tears
  • TM 004: Agility
  • TM 005: Mud Slap
  • TM 006: Scary Face
  • TM 007: Protect
  • TM 008: Fire Fang
  • TM 009: Thunder Fang
  • TM 010: Ice Fang
  • TM 011: Water Pulse
  • TM 012: Low Kick
  • TM 013: Acid Spray
  • TM 014: Acrobatics
  • TM 015: Struggle Bug
  • TM 016: Psybeam
  • TM 017: Confuse Ray
  • TM 018: Thief
  • TM 019: Disarming Voice
  • TM 020: Trailblaze
  • TM 021: Pounce
  • TM 022: Chilling Water
  • TM 023: Charge Beam
  • TM 024: Fire Spin
  • TM 025: Facade
  • TM 026: Poison Tail
  • TM 027: Aerial Ace
  • TM 028: Bulldoze
  • TM 029: Hex
  • TM 030: Snarl
  • TM 031: Metal Claw
  • TM 032: Swift
  • TM 033: Magical Leaf
  • TM 034: Icy Wind
  • TM 035: Mud Shot
  • TM 036: Rock Tomb
  • TM 037: Draining Kiss
  • TM 038: Flame Charge
  • TM 039: Low Sweep
  • TM 040: Air Cutter
  • TM 041: Stored Power
  • TM 042: Night Shade
  • TM 043: Fling
  • TM 044: Dragon Tail
  • TM 045: Venoshock
  • TM 046: Avalanche
  • TM 047: Endure
  • TM 048: Volt Switch
  • TM 049: Sunny Day
  • TM 050: Rain Dance
  • TM 051: Sandstorm
  • TM 052: Snowscape
  • TM 053: Smart Strike
  • TM 054: Psyshock
  • TM 055: Dig
  • TM 056: Bullet Seed
  • TM 057: False Swipe
  • TM 058: Brick Break
  • TM 059: Zen Headbutt
  • TM 060: U-Turn
  • TM 061: Shadow Claw
  • TM 062: Foul Play
  • TM 063: Psychic Fangs
  • TM 064: Bulk Up
  • TM 065: Air Slash
  • TM 066: Body Slam
  • TM 067: Fire Punch
  • TM 068: Thunder Punch
  • TM 069: Ice Punch
  • TM 070: Sleep Talk
  • TM 071: Seed Bomb
  • TM 072: Electro Ball
  • TM 073: Drain Punch
  • TM 074: Reflect
  • TM 075: Light Screen
  • TM 076: Rock Blast
  • TM 077: Waterfall
  • TM 078: Dragon Claw
  • TM 079: Dazzling Gleam
  • TM 080: Metronome
  • TM 081: Grass Knot
  • TM 082: Thunder Wave
  • TM 083: Poison Jab
  • TM 084: Stomping Tantrum
  • TM 085: Rest
  • TM 086: Rock Slide
  • TM 087: Taunt
  • TM 088: Swords Dance
  • TM 089: Body Press
  • TM 090: Spikes
  • TM 091: Toxic Spikes
  • TM 092: Imprison
  • TM 093: Flash Cannon
  • TM 094: Dark Pulse
  • TM 095: Leech Life
  • TM 096: Eerie Impulse
  • TM 097: Fly
  • TM 098: Skill Swap
  • TM 099: Iron Head
  • TM 100: Dragon Dance
  • TM 101: Power Gem
  • TM 102: Gunk Shot
  • TM 103: Substitute
  • TM 104: Iron Defense
  • TM 105: X-Scissor
  • TM 106: Drill Run
  • TM 107: Will-O-Wisp
  • TM 108: Crunch
  • TM 109: Trick
  • TM 110: Liquidation
  • TM 111: Giga Drain
  • TM 112: Aura Sphere
  • TM 113: Tailwind
  • TM 114: Shadow Ball
  • TM 115: Dragon Pulse
  • TM 116: Stealth Rock
  • TM 117: Hyper Voice
  • TM 118: Heat Wave
  • TM 119: Energy Ball
  • TM 120: Psychic
  • TM 121: Heavy Slam
  • TM 122: Encore
  • TM 123: Surf
  • TM 124: Ice Spinner
  • TM 125: Flamethrower
  • TM 126: Thunderbolt
  • TM 127: Play Rough
  • TM 128: Amnesia
  • TM 129: Calm Mind
  • TM 130: Helping Hand
  • TM 131: Pollen Puff
  • TM 132: Baton Pass
  • TM 133: Earth Power
  • TM 134: Reversal
  • TM 135: Ice Beam
  • TM 136: Electric Terrain
  • TM 137: Grassy Terrain
  • TM 138: Psychic Terrain
  • TM 139: Misty Terrain
  • TM 140: Nasty Plot
  • TM 141: Fire Blast
  • TM 142: Hydro Pump
  • TM 143: Blizzard
  • TM 144: Fire Pledge
  • TM 145: Water Pledge
  • TM 146: Grass Pledge
  • TM 147: Wild Charge
  • TM 148: Sludge Bomb
  • TM 149: Earthquake
  • TM 150: Stone Edge
  • TM 151: Phantom Force
  • TM 152: Giga Impact
  • TM 153: Blast Burn
  • TM 154: Hydro Cannon
  • TM 155: Frenzy Plant
  • TM 156: Outrage
  • TM 157: Overheat
  • TM 158: Focus Blast
  • TM 159: Leaf Storm
  • TM 160: Hurricane
  • TM 161: Trick Room
  • TM 162: Bug Buzz
  • TM 163: Hyper Beam
  • TM 164: Brave Bird
  • TM 165: Flare Blitz
  • TM 166: Thunder
  • TM 167: Close Combat
  • TM 168: Solar Beam
  • TM 169: Draco Meteor
  • TM 170: Steel Beam
  • TM 171: Tera Blast

You made it to the bottom, found what you were looking for, or were nice enough to scroll all the way down out of the goodness of your heart. However you ended up here, check out our other guides for Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, including how to get Tera Shards, check IVs, and get the Amulet Coin. Our guides hub for the game has more.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Get Iron Hands https://www.gameskinny.com/9sglr/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-iron-hands https://www.gameskinny.com/9sglr/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-iron-hands Mon, 05 Dec 2022 10:02:20 -0500 John Schutt

Some of the new additions to Pokemon Scarlet and Violet are making waves in the Tera Raid Battle meta, and one of the top contenders for five and six-star Raids is Iron Hands. Available only in Violet, this Pokemon from the future has the stats, survivability, and move list to take on almost any high-difficulty content in the game.

Only specific six and seven-star raids require a change, with Iron Hands coasting through most other endgame activities. Thankfully, this new Pokemon isn’t hard to come by once you can start capturing them, but you’ll be spending quite a few hours earning the right.

How to Capture Iron Hands in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Iron Hands is native to only one location in Pokemon Violet: Area Zero in the Great Crater of Paldea. That means you need to complete the main story campaign, including all the Gyms, Titans, and Team Star bases, plus heading into Area Zero for the final fights. Once the credits finish rolling, however, you’re free to head back down into the crater and start hunting for your perfect Iron Hands.

You can fast-travel to the Zero Gate after all the post-game cutscenes finish and before you start any of the endgame content. Teleport to the first Research Station, head out into the level and wander around for a few moments. Provided you’re playing the Violet version or are in a Violet player’s world through online co-op, you should see at least one or two Iron Hands in the mix.

Every Iron Hands you fight in Area Zero will be around levels 51 through 54. They’re a Fighting/Electric dual type, so bring either Ground, Psychic, or Flying types to whittle down their HP.

You can eat a sandwich with Encounter Power: Fighting before coming down into Area Zero will prioritize Iron Hands spawns, making it easier to find them, and if it’s your thing, hunt for a shiny version.

Your ideal Iron Hands has a Nature that increases its Attack stat without sacrificing either of its Defense stats. Once you have one on your team, it’s time to start training it. Use either Experience Candies or grind high-experience-giving Pokemon like Chansey to take it to level 100, then increase its HP and Attack IVs and EVs, and you’ll have an absolute monster on your…hands.

With all this knowledge, you can hunt for your perfect Iron Hands in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Again, they’re only available in a Violet player’s world, but with co-op, even Scarlet players can capture one. You can trade for them as well. For an easy way to change your Iron Hands’ nature, check out our guide to Nature Mints and our articles on the best Gym order and how to get Tera Shards. Our Scarlet and Violet guides hub has more.

]]>
The Callisto Protocol Collectibles: All Data Bios and Audio Logs https://www.gameskinny.com/5d13o/the-callisto-protocol-collectibles-all-data-bios-and-audio-logs https://www.gameskinny.com/5d13o/the-callisto-protocol-collectibles-all-data-bios-and-audio-logs Sat, 03 Dec 2022 15:38:04 -0500 Jonathan Moore

There are 43 data bios and audio logs to find throughout The Callisto Protocol's eight chapters. Finding all of these collectibles will give you more insight into Callisto's lore and reward you with the Grim Reaper trophy/achievement. 

It's important to note the game's save system can impact how you pick up these collectibles. Manual saves only mark progress up to the last autosave checkpoint, meaning you can pick up data bios and logs, manually save, quit, then reload later at a point before picking them up.

After picking up a collectible, always make it to a section where the circular auto-save icon appears in the bottom right corner before quitting — or you'll have to pick them up again. 

The Callisto Protocol Collectibles: Data Bios and Audio Log Locations

Chapter 1: Cargo

Jacob’s Job

This audio log is at the beginning of the game when you gain control of Jacob exiting the cockpit. Go down the hallway from the cockpit, and immediately turn left at the end of the hallway. Go through the door into the small living quarters, then turn left and interact with the locker between the bunk beds and the table.

Chapter 2: Outbreak

Mahler’s Appointment

You’ll eventually come to a section where you have to sneak past security robots. Sneak past the first robot by climbing through the vents and crouch-walking through the area. Go through a door marked Medical Ward M105 to enter a new area, where you’ll see a second security robot.

Use the Shiv to open the red, locked door in front of you (Intensive Care M109). Follow the path and go through a green door (Medical Ward M105) by a dead body hanging over the low wall. On the other side, you’ll see yet another green door (Implant M110) across the hall that leads into a room with a large glass window and the same surgical device that put the implant in your neck earlier in the game.

Go into that room (Surgery M112), and look to the right of the stairs on the far side, near another door, for this log. This collectible is to the left of where you pick up the first gate fuse to unlock the Mezzanine.

Elias’s Anticipation

After leaving the Weapon’s Lockup and making your way back outside, follow the path past the bridge leading to the base of the Watchtower and go back to Elias’s now-open cell. Watch the enemies as you go through the archway by the bridge. Hop over the debris, and turn right to find the cell, the audio log on the table on the right side.

Ferris’s Lament

After the cutscene in Panopticon Control in the Watchtower, you’ll find this audio log collectible on the corner of the control room’s central table with the blue hologram of the prison.

Chapter 3: Aftermath

Sgt. Eric Jane: Locked Door

After fighting the first ranged enemy of the game, follow the path through the area before crawling through a vent and dropping into a room with a security robot and enemies. Clear the area and interact with the locked Laundry B202 door on the far side. Go back to the security robot and interact with the dead body.

Ofc. Pruitt Matos: Laundry

Now go through the locked laundry door, and follow the path ahead, down, and right. Continue ahead by the revolving, hanging bags and fight the surprise enemy. After, go through the door on the right. Turn right at the bottom of the ramp, and follow the path left through the washing machines. Go past the half-raised door to Office B112. Interact with the body on the ground inside.

Duncan Cole: Secret Room 1

Go back to the main floor of the laundry and take the left door this time. Go down the ramp and straight ahead, where you’ll see a room with a large glass window. Open the door on the right side using the Shiv. Go through the low air duct to the right inside.

On the other side (which will take a little while), follow the stone path all the way down and drop through the hole in the floor. Turn left when you land, and go all the way to the end, squeezing through a door to enter a room with red flags on the walls. The audio log is on the table at the back of the room.

Dr. Ewan Hayes: MedLab Outbreak

Use the ladder near the secret room to find your way back up to the room with the air duct you just previously crawled through. Exit, and fight the two enemies. Then go back towards the ramp that led down from the Laundry door, and enter the Maintenance B414 door on the right. Follow the linear path, fight the enemy that crashes through the glass, and go through the Access Hall B433 gate.

Open the door at the end of the path to enter a MedLab with stretchers, flickering lights, and a path curving left. Interact with the dead body in the pool of blood in the path.

Ofc. Dachs Symmons: Hanged Guard

After making your way through the MedLab, you’ll come to a QTE door labeled Maintenance C110 as part of the critical path. You’ll find a gruesome scene of hanged, eviscerated guards on the other side. Interact with the body on the ground beneath them for this audio log collectible.

Ofc. Kerry Brown

From there, take the elevator down. At the bottom, following the QTE with the nightmare fuel monster, stay left and climb up the ledge. After the second nightmare tentacle monster, drop down. Follow the path left (minding another zombie)m then right at the fan.

Turn left and go ahead toward the fire, then take another left at the fire. Interact with second body, the one nearest the fan. A zombie will jump out of the ground vent when you get close, so be ready.

Tadhg Song

Use the gondola to reach the Shu. When you disembark on the other side, turn left and climb up the ledges to a catwalk above. Interact with the body on the ground near the switch.

Dani Nakamura

Take the elevator down from the Shu controls, kill the enemies outside, and interact with the middle set of cell controls on the right side. Interact with the table inside the cell after the cutscene.

Chapter 4: Habitat

Dr. Caitlyn Mahler: Corruptors

While following the red pipe, you’ll find yourself in a sewage area with a rotating mechanism. Fight the enemy, and turn the valve on the far side to open a pathway through another crawlspace.

Near the end, you’ll see a guard in the muck and a terrifying beast take them away. Continue forward and through the pipe ahead, and drop down. Turn left and another of Elias’ holograms will play. Climb the crate it stops in front of, then up to the small gantry. Inspect the boxes along the wall in front of you for the log.

Ofc. Bruno Vorenus: Crosswired

Follow the critical path by jumping down and going through the crawlspace by the door. When you enter the caves, continue into the next area and stay right to pick up the first blue fuse on the crate near the center of the area. The second fuse is in the back right corner on a crate, with a body on the ground nearby. Interact with the body near the door for Access Hall H271.

Dr. Jae Moon-Bell: Cocoons

After going through the underground water area with the swimming monster, you’ll find yourself in an expansive area with metal gangways, sprawling pipes, and huge square windows on the left side. Fight through the enemies and retrieve the gate fuse to open the door for Access Hall H206. Follow the path all the way to the end, and use the Shiv to open the door for Storage Hall H239.

Continue forward, and go through the next door. Grab the fuse on the right and use it on the door on the left. Go through decontamination, then into the back right corner. The log is underneath a dead body on a gurney.

Ofc James Reese

After you’ve learned about mutating enemies and shooting their tentacles for the first time, you’ll find yourself in a room that has “Shoot the Tentacles” written on the wall. Interact with the dead guard on the chair on the same wall to get the keycode and audio log.

Sgt. Bill Pekelo

Reach Oxygen Processing inside the Habitat Dome, and go through the door on the right side, Oxygen Processing H625. Follow the path to the end, and go through the door on the left. Continue up and left, crawling through pipes into a large, open hall. A wall-crawling creature will appear at the far end of the hallway.

Defeat it, then use a crate at the end of the hallway to enter the air duct it emerged from. Follow the duct and drop down to find a body to your right with the keycode to progress and this bio data collectible.

Ofc. James Reese: Security

Now go through the nearby door labeled Botanical H624. Go to the end of the hall, and go into the door on the right labeled Utility Hall H626, by the 02 Botanical Recycling sign hanging from the ceiling. Go up some stairs, then right, and squeeze through a small space in the wall. Interact with the log on the crate on the right.

Ofc. Kyle Serra: Evacuation

From Oxygen Processing, head back outside and follow the markers to the Utility building; look for a door labeled Utility H630. Inside, use the Shiv to open the door on the left side. Go all the way to the end (the Tram Depot Entrance sign hanging from the ceiling), defeat the enemies, and inspect a crate on the left side for the data bios.

Chapter 5: Lost

Miranda Kristofich: Terraforming

After the cutscene with the emergency beacon, open the gate leading to the hangar. Go through the gate, then straight to the back of the area and through the doorway directly in front of you. Inspect the shelves inside to the left for this audio log collectible.

Richard Cids

Make your way through the area, and you’ll eventually reach a second gate after crossing a crumbling bridge. Someone will ask for your help in this area. Stay on the right side by the Snowcat, and look for a lit doorway with a large 6-light industrial light tower above it. Get close, and the zombie inside will break down the door. Defeat them, then inspect the body on the floor inside.

Dr. Caitlyn Mahler: Combustors

Now go into the tunnels. Follow the path, and you’ll crawl through some rubble. On the other side, turn left immediately to follow the short corridor into a room with radioactive barrels. This log is on the table to the right of the barrels.

Lt. Devon Wayne: Close the Gate

After meeting an ally at the garage and getting the Riot Shotgun, go up the stairs and through the door at the top. Inspect the body on the other side of the tables on the left side of the room.

Aaron Tycho

Once at the second power station, open the gates blocking your way (near the zombie in the cage), and go through the door into an area with a large fan in the right wall. There is a body stuck in a turbine near the fan. Interact with it for this collectible.

Max Barrow: Max’s Concern

After riding in the Snowcat, go into the ship and left once inside. Go through the crew compartment, then into the second doorway on the left. The data bios log is on a table on the right side.

Sgt. Scott Dvitny: Eradication

After the cutscene on the ship, follow Dani into the building by slipping through the crack in the door. Inside, go right and into the Snowcat. Interact with the body on the floor.

Dr. Caitlyn Mahler: Shipments

Continue, and you’ll eventually reach an area full of bodies and malfunctioning robots on the way to an elevator. This data bios log is on a crate by a body with no legs directly across from where you enter, right of the elevator, near a short stairwell.

Chapter 6: Below

Dr. Sheehan Yune: Field Log 1

After falling down the elevator shaft and cutting yourself loose, defeat the blind zombie and follow the path around down the stairs. Go into the next room, and drop down. Inspect the table on the right side of the room for this collectible by the graffiti that says “Don’t Make a Sound.”

Dr. Sheehan Yune: Field Log 2

 

Eventually, you’ll crawl through a tunnel in a cave. On the other side, climb up the rock ledges and follow the path through an open area with an egg-sac tentacle monster and four blind zombies. Go through the door on the other side of the area, then turn left immediately. The log is on a crate at the end near a small blue item crate, opposite a broken path leading up.

Dr. Sheehan Yune: Field Log 3

Enter the Access Junction Power Tunnels after getting the keycard from the lift. Follow the path around, and go through the right opening (not down). Interact with the body on the ground at the end of the tunnel, on the right side.

Yannick Sage: Secret Room 2

Eventually, after going through far too many rooms and areas with far too many blind zombies, you’ll reach a ladder leading up with a fan in the wall behind it. Go straight through the crack in the wall in front of you at the top. Follow the linear path down and through tight tunnels until you reach another secret room. The log is on the table in the back.

Arden Jeddha: Arcas Evacuation

Once the lift arrives at Arcas Station (after the objectively terrible boss fight), exit the lift and go toward the door against the far wall. Inspect the body just before the stairs leading up to the door for this data bios.

Chapter 7: Colony

Alex Wang: Miner Log 1

As soon as the chapter begins, go forward, and turn left. You’ll see a large, bronze Welcome sign hanging from the ceiling in the distance under a flickering light. There is a body in the pathway ahead of you. Inspect it for the collectible.

Derryn Barr: Mining Log 2

When you reach the Colony and Dani mentions the light tower, turn left to follow the path. You’ll come to a ladder leading down; this data bios log is on a shelf to the right of the ladder before descending.

Derryn Barr: Mining Log 3

Eventually, you’ll arrive in an area with stalking blind zombies. There is a locked elevator in the back of the area with a Lowtown Elevator Control sign above it. To the right of that is a building with a ladder and a Midtown sign. Take the ladder up. Go right at the top, then left into the door near the window with the red, pulsing light. Go to the back of the house to find a body on the floor with a blind zombie guarding it.

Yannick Sage: The Mole

Take the elevator up from the shanty town, and interact with the body on the ground just outside of the elevator when it stops.

Buidhe Reddwork: Hightown

Go up the stairs from the last collectible and through another small shanty. You’ll come to another set of stairs; take them up to Hightown. Turn right at the top, and go into the house in front of you, across from the building with the Bathroom and Roof Top signs on it.

Ji-Kwan Park: Miner Log 4

Continue left through the shanty to pick up the gate fuse, then backtrack toward the last collectible to continue forward. You’ll soon come to a door in need of a fuse. Open it. You’ll see a Reforger ahead of you and a body to the left. Interact with the body for this data bios.

Duncan Cole: Disagreement

Exit the Colony on the Funicular. When it stops after the cutscene, go toward the Snowcat, but stay right to find the log on a crate on the other side of the Funicular railing

Chapter 8: Tower

Dr. Tala Ismene: Observation

As you make your way through the facility, you’ll come to a control room with a locked door (Panopticon Surveillance B330) and a sparking breaker box. Find the fuse for this door in the nearby server room (be ready for a boss fight), then go through it. Turn left, and follow the path to the gate at the end (mind the two enemies that pop out here), and grab the data bios from the table on the right.

Dr. Tala Ismene: Taken

Go through the psych ward, and you’ll eventually climb down a ladder. At the bottom, exit the room, and turn left. You’ll see a door labeled Psyc Block 1 A140 at the end. Use the GRP to open the air duct to the right of the door (beware the two enemies that appear here). Crawl through the duct, and go right when you drop down. Grab the gate fuse from the room on the right, then go up the stairs and interact with the biohazard container at the top for this collectible.

Edward Bates: Experimentation

Beat the boss in the Medical Ward, and go through the door labeled Research Checkpoint R001. Go through the next area, and grab this data bios off a metal object with pipes on the right side once through the security door. )This is where I got the Grim Reaper Trophy.)

Duncan Cole: Cole’s Triumph

Take the elevator up the tower after the long cutscene explaining the Protocol. Exit the elevator at the top, and go through the door into a museum. The data log is on the table in the back left corner.

And that's where to find all of the data bios and audio logs in The Callisto Protocol. Now you have the Grim Reaper trophy and achievement, putting you that much closer to 100%, should you dare to play the game on its highest difficulty. Either way, with all of the collectibles in hand, you now know more about the events leading up to the game's story. 

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Beat 6-Star Tera Raid Battles https://www.gameskinny.com/y4d35/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-beat-6-star-tera-raid-battles https://www.gameskinny.com/y4d35/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-beat-6-star-tera-raid-battles Fri, 02 Dec 2022 12:53:33 -0500 John Schutt

You can do only a few things once you reach the endgame of Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, and the main one is 6-star Tera Raid Battles. These ultra-difficult encounters pit you against near-max level Terastal Pokemon that use light MMO raid-style mechanics and that you need to defeat within an aggressive time limit.

Don’t expect to win these fights with just any Pokemon, even if they’re also near-max level — you need to build specifically for 6-star Raids and use particular strategies to come out on top. Let's go over what you need to know to beat 6-star Tera Raid battles in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

How to Beat 6-Star Raids in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

6-star Tera Raid battles are difficult for multiple reasons. The enemy Pokemon has much more HP and higher defenses than your standard wild 'mon, and they’ll also summon shields you need to break, remove status effects, and easily one or two-shot any Pokemon not up to the fight.

While soloing these challenging encounters is possible, doing so takes serious preparation. Here are the most important steps you can take.

Pick the Right Pokemon

Not every Pokemon is suitable for high-level Raids. The ones you want to use can dish out massive damage quickly, buff that damage on command, and self-heal when necessary. They should also have enough survivability to tank even super-effective hits from the Terastal opponent.

There are a few meta options you should seriously consider bringing.

  • Iron Hands is the current go-to. Its massive Attack and HP stats, plus the ability to use Belly Drum for an Attack boost and Drain Punch for damage and healing, make it ideal for conquering even the toughest challenges.
  • Azumarill with the Fairy Tera Type is an excellent second option. When fighting a Special Attack Tera Pokemon that’d be effective against Iron Hands, Azumarill is a good alternative. It adds Fairy-type moves to your repertoire and provides coverage against some of Iron Hands’ weaknesses.
  • Koraidon/Miraidon are also good alternatives. The box Legendary for Scarlet and Violet can be a good tertiary option, primarily because you’re limited to two of them per playthrough and thus can’t be properly farmed. Their statline, movelist, and type advantages allow them to take on almost anything in the 6-star pool.
Train Your Pokemon to their Limits

6-star Tera Raids require specially trained Pokemon to properly overcome. Even using the meta choices, you’ll want to take a few steps to prepare them properly.

  • Level your team to 100. 6-star battles all but require max-level Pokemon, so you’ll be doing some grinding to get your main team up to snuff. Lower-level Tera Raids will provide the Experience Candy you need to get your Pokemon to 100, as will farming high-level mons out in the wild.
  • Hyper train your Pokemon to their maximum. Hyper Training takes paying a man near the Montenevera Pokemon Center in Bottle Caps to increase your team’s IVs. You can also use Supplement drugs like Protein and Carbos for a quick boost. You can only increase two of your Pokemon’s stats to their absolute peak, so pick the ones they’re already best at for improvement.
  • EV train your Pokemon. On top of IVs, there are also effort values that increase the base stats of your team. These EVs can increase through Training by battling specific wild or Trainer Pokemon. You can also equip special items to boost your EV gains further.
Use the right strategies

While it’s possible to steamroll 6-star Tera Raids with a fully-equipped Iron Hands or Azumarill, sometimes you might find yourself coming up against an unexpected wall. That’s when you should supplement raw power with tactics.

  • Only Terastallize to take out the shield. Midway through a Tera Raid, provided you haven’t already made the opponent faint, the Raid Pokemon will summon a shield that vastly increases their defense. That’s your cue to Terastallize your Pokemon to maximize its ability to breach the barrier. If your partner faints, you lose the Terastal effect, so be sure you’re ready.
  • Use support moves if your team is having trouble. Moves like Helping Hand and cheering for heals or attack boosts can be essential if your teammates — whether they’re real players or AI — are on the ropes.
  • One faint is not the end. If your Pokemon happens to faint, there will be a five-second cooldown before they’re back in the fight. Fainting once is not the end of the world, so account for it in your planning. Fainting twice or three times, however, is probably the end of the Raid.

If you take these tips to heart, 6-star Tera Raid Battles should be much more manageable than if you went in unprepared. With the right Pokemon and enough Training, they can even be easy.

It’s all a matter of how much effort you want to put in to take your team to its maximum potential. For more on Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, check out our guides on how to get Tera Shards and how to breed and get eggs. Our Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides hub has more.

]]>
Warhammer 40k: Darktide — Long Bomb Achievement Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/qclmm/warhammer-40k-darktide-long-bomb-achievement-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/qclmm/warhammer-40k-darktide-long-bomb-achievement-guide Fri, 02 Dec 2022 10:26:16 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are many achievements in Warhammer 40k: Darktide that require players to really show their skill and ability of perfect controls. But there is not one achievement in he game as hard as the "Long Bomb" Penance.

Our guide will provide you with tips on how to get the Long Bomb achievement in Warhammer 40k: Darktide, including a short list of maps that are most suitable for this penance.

Go Far Up and Aim High

In order to get the Long Bomb achievement players need to satisfy the following requirements:

  • Use Sharpshooter class.
  • Use Frag Grenade.
  • Hit at least five enemies at once.
  • Grenade must not bounce off the floor.

The most important condition for this achievement is to not let the frag grenade to bounce off, which is what makes this Penance so difficult. The solution is to find a tall spot and aim really high before throwing the grenade.

Such specific conditions can be met only on a handful of maps, but the best ones for the Long Bomb achievement are:

  • Chasm Station HL-16-11: Assassination.
  • Chasm Logistratum: Raid.

Both Chasm maps are very spacious and have no ceilings. Also mobs tend to spawn in groups, which is good for quick kills.

In order to complete this penance players need to do the following:

  1. Wait for a group of at least five enemies to spawn in a single spot.
  2. Find an ascension in a distance, which allows you to aim at the group of mobs from afar and above.
  3. Prepare a frag grenade and aim at an angle of at least 50 degrees above the mobs (depends on your distance).
  4. Once you're ready, release the grenade.

If you did everything right, there is a decent chance that your grenade will hit the mobs without bouncing off the floor. Try to adjust your distance and your aiming angle, and try again in case the first attempt wasn't successful.

That's all you need to know on how to get the Long Bomb Penance in Warhammer 40k: Darktide. Be sure to check out the rest of Warhammer 40k: Darktide guides right here.

]]>
Warhammer 40k: Darktide — What Are Wounds? https://www.gameskinny.com/f7glx/warhammer-40k-darktide-what-are-wounds https://www.gameskinny.com/f7glx/warhammer-40k-darktide-what-are-wounds Fri, 02 Dec 2022 10:15:58 -0500 Sergey_3847

Some of the terminology in Warhammer 40k: Darktide can be confusing to the new players. Fatshark added more explanations for stat terms in-game with launch, but some are still obtuse. "Wounds" is one such term that the game doesn't explicitly describe, and you'll want to know what Wounds means.

Our guide will answer the question: what are Wounds in Warhammer 40k: Darktide?

Additional Tally on the Health Bar

The term "Wound" comes from the original tabletop Warhammer 40k game, which in the case of Darktide means an additional tally on the health bar. This means you can be picked back up an additional time, before being killed and having to be rescued.

Rejects have three Wounds by default, and it can be increased by as many Wounds as your Curio selection can muster. Though, the default amount is two on Heresy.

You won't run into this stat before you unlock the ability to equip Curios, which comes at level eight. You eventually have three total Curio slots, with the final coming at Trust level 24.

An additional point or two in Wounds certainly won't hurt as you start pushing into Malice, and especially on Heresy Threat level. On Uprising or below, you may not need them unless you are new to your class or are still learning the ropes to the game.

Do you need Wounds to be a good teammate in Darktide? No, but if you're particularly reckless or pushing into higher difficulties, you're going to want at least one additional Wound to survive. Be sure to check out the rest of Darktide guides right here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Warhammer 40k: Darktide — How to Apply Weapon Skins and Trinkets https://www.gameskinny.com/egjt0/warhammer-40k-darktide-how-to-apply-weapon-skins-and-trinkets https://www.gameskinny.com/egjt0/warhammer-40k-darktide-how-to-apply-weapon-skins-and-trinkets Thu, 01 Dec 2022 19:21:05 -0500 Ashley Shankle

You have a handful of obvious cosmetic options for your characters in Warhammer 40k: Darktide, buy applying skins and trinkets to your weapons isn't so clear. With Imperial Edition owners getting their goodies in and weapon skins available right at the Armoury Exchange, you'll want to know how to apply weapon skins and trinkets.

It's possible that putting skins on weapons will be made a bit easier in later Darktide updates, but for the time being it's a little out of the way and separate from how you apply other cosmetics to your rejects.

Cosmetics that you apply to your character directly can be chosen right in the Wargear screen when you press the I key and swap over to the Cosmetics tab. You can apply clothing, portrait frame, and insignias in the Cosmetics tab, as well as choose between stances. But weapon skins are nowhere to be found in this menu — they've got to be accessed elsewhere.

How to Apply Weapon Skins and Trinkets in Darktide

You don't have to wander far to customize your weapons' appearance. Still in the Wargear menu, you'll want to focus on the Loadout tab.

Select the weapon in your inventory that you want to apply a skin to and then either press the C key or click on the 'Appearance' button at the bottom right of the screen.

You can choose your weapon skin from here and just click Confirm to apply it.

If you are trying to apply a trinket to a weapon, look to the top left portion of the Appearance screen.

There are two icons above your skin selection, one for weapon appearance and one for trinkets. Click over to the trinket tab to select and confirm your trinket selection for that weapon.

You'll have to do this for each new weapon you equip and want to customize, but it's just a few clicks to take care of it.

This is one of the more minor things to know about in Darktide, but being able to customize your character and weapons makes them that more special when you've got Perks and Blessings you're particularly pleased with. We've got more Darktide guides coming here on GameSkinny, though none of them will be about how Ogryn are all good boys. They are, though.

]]>
Warhammer 40k: Darktide — How to Kill the Daemonhost https://www.gameskinny.com/6nw21/warhammer-40k-darktide-how-to-kill-the-daemonhost https://www.gameskinny.com/6nw21/warhammer-40k-darktide-how-to-kill-the-daemonhost Thu, 01 Dec 2022 17:27:18 -0500 Ashley Shankle

How many teams have been wiped by the Daemonhost so far in Warhammer 40,000: Darktide? Who knows. How many are going to be wiped by it throughout the game's lifetime? Probably too many, or just enough! It depends on your point of view.

The Daemonhost is the most lethal boss in the game so far and works similar to the Witch from Left 4 Dead and the Hag from Back 4 Blood, meaning you generally want to avoid this enemy if you can. The only glory you can gain from downing the Daemonhost is an achievement and saying you did it, otherwise it's more of a nuisance than it is fun for most rejects.

Initially there were rumors that the Daemonhost can only be killed by a team with an Ogryn equipped with a Slab Shield, and those rumors do persist because the easiest way to directly deal with this boss is to have a shield-bearing Ogryn holding Defensive Stance. However, most teams don't have an Ogryn with a shield and it would be a bit unreasonable for a boss to require something so specific, at least at threat levels lower than 4 (Heresy).

That said, the Daemonhost does require skill, awareness, and effort regardless of difficulty. And it is not recommended to engage at all if you are on Heresy difficulty and do not have an Ogryn with a Slab Shield. Just do not bother unless you are on a premade team who know what they're doing. Actually, I probably would not recommend even engaging it in a Malice-level mission with random players unless you all agree to handle it.

It is possible to down this nuisance on Malice and below without the aforementioned shielded big'un, though, so let's go into what you need to know about the Daemonhost.

How to Kill the Daemonhost in Darktide

Before we get into how to kill it, do be aware that you can avoid the Daemonhost completely in most circumstances. We'll go into that after this section.

Does it wreak as much havoc as the Beast of Nurgle? No. Does it inevitably put a big dent in the entire team's health like the Plague Ogryn? No. It just kills two of your team's rejects and disappears like some sort of cruel joke.

Aggroing a Daemonhost in the middle of a horde or when dealing with more troublesome mutants can mean a full wipe for your team, so you'll want to engage carefully if you do choose to do so and you have to hope everyone on is aware enough of its location and the danger it poses.

If you are unlucky enough to have had someone aggro a Daemonhost, keep the following points in mind:

  • The Daemonhost will knock out and then kill two players, one after the other. Both knocking them out and killing them take time, which you should be using to either get away from the boss or to focus fire it. Every second counts.

  • You must focus-fire the Daemonhost if you intend to take it down. All of your team members need to prioritize it.

  • The Daemonhost is immune to staggering, so don't put effort into trying to knock it down.

  • If you've got an Ogryn and you actually want to try to down the thing, you want the Ogryn to have the boss's attention over anyone else whether it's got a shield or not. Hopefully they are able to block for long enough that it's either dead or nearly dead.

  • Be aware of the Corruption level of whoever engages and holds aggro. If they are at high Corruption or just low health in general, you may not want to engage. There is far more wiggle room here if your Ogryn has a Slab Shield.

  • Can you take it on without an Ogryn? Yes, below Malice. On Malice itself, it's possible but it's much easier with an Ogryn and it doesn't need a shield to block through provided it doesn't engage with drained Stamina. On Heresy, you do need an Ogryn with a Slab Shield.

How to Avoid the Daemonhost

Of course, you very well may not want to fight this boss because fighting it isn't exactly fun. Luckily, this boss can be avoided completely.

The Daemonhost will whisper when it's dormant, signalling to you and your team that it's nearby. It's impossible to miss provided you've got the game audio on (which you should), and its whispering can even be heard through walls.

You can see it easily when it's dormant as well. The area around the resting Daemonhost will glow with green fog, with the boss itself curled up at the center. If someone gets a bit near the Daemonhost, it will stand in preparation of attack; if they get too close, it will initiate on its own. And if it's shot first, it will attack whoever caught its attention.

As long as no one steps into the green glow or accidentally shoots it, the Daemonhost should stay dormant and let you pass. This should be your usual course of action, considering the risk involved in directly fighting it.

That's almost all you need to know about taking on the Daemonhost boss in Warhammer 40k: Darktide, the game's most cumbersome and annoying enemy. Check out our other Darktide guides on GameSkinny.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Best Shield Ronds https://www.gameskinny.com/48x6d/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-shield-ronds https://www.gameskinny.com/48x6d/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-shield-ronds Thu, 01 Dec 2022 11:43:20 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are 12 shield Ronds in God of War: Ragnarok, which are special attachments that may increase Kratos' stats and provide him with additional offensive and defensive abilities. Many of these Ronds can be obtained as rewards for completing certain favors.

Our guide will provide you with a list of the best shield Ronds in God of War: Ragnarok, including tips on how to obtain them.

Rond of Obliteration

The Rond of Obliteration's stats are as follows:

  • Strength: 10
  • Defense: 10
  • Runic: 13
  • Cooldown: 13
  • Luck: 13
  • Vitality: 13

This is the most powerful shield attachment in God of War: Ragnarok, as it not only buffs all of Kratos' stats, but it also provides players with a ranged weaponry called Shards of the Valkyrie.

In order to use this weapon, players need to hold block for a few seconds, letting the shield charge, and then press Block + L3, releasing a volley of shards that will strike all enemies within a certain distance.

Rond of Obliteration can be used at Level 8, but it can be upgraded to level 9. Here are the upgrade requirements and stats.

  • Level 9 Rond of Obliteration requires 14,000 Hacksilver, 30 Dust of Realms, 45 Shining Crystal and has the following stats:
    • Strength: 11
    • Defense: 11
    • Runic: 14
    • Cooldown: 14
    • Luck: 14
    • Vitality: 14
How to get Rond of Obliteration

When players finish the main story campaign of the game, they will gain access to one more boss: Gna.

Note that this is the hardest boss in the game, who can be found in a secret place at The Crucible in Muspelheim (indicated on the map above).

The entrance to this location can be found next to the Nornir Chest, and once you enter the area and pick up the book, the battle will begin.

In addition to Rond of Obliteration, players will also get The Queen's Armor for Freya, and The Queen's Roar runic summon.

Rond of Disruption

The Rond of Disruption's base stats are as follows:

  • Defense: 22
  • Runic: 17
  • Luck: 17

While Rond of Obliteration is focused on buffing all of Kratos' stats, this shield attachment is mainly focused on defense and luck. It could be a good companion to either a low stat shield or an armor that is low on those specific stats.

Rond of Disruption also has a chance of creating an Elemental Storm, which is an AoE attack that can be used both offensively and defensively. Players need to double tap the Block button, and then Parry.

Rond of Disruption can be obtained at Level 7, but it can be upgraded to level 9. Here are the upgrade requirements and stats.

  • Level 8 requires 10,000 Hacksilver, 15 Dust of Realms, 3 Luminous Alloy and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 25
    • Runic: 20
    • Luck: 20
  • Level 9 requires 14,000 Hacksilver, 30 Dust of Realms, 45 Shining Crystals and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 29
    • Runic: 23
    • Luck: 23
How to get Rond of Disruption

This attachment can be obtained after completing "A Stag for All Seasons" favor, which requires players to gather all stags in Vanaheim.

You can use our guide for all stag locations in God of War: Ragnarok right here.

Rond of Absorption

Rond of Absorption's stats are as follows:

  • Defense: 18
  • Runic: 22

Here is another example of an offensive shield with strong base defenses. But unlike Rond of Disruption, this shield attachment is a lot easier to obtain.

Whenever players Block or Parry enemy attacks, Rond of Absorption automatically increases your Permafrost, Immolation, and Maelstrom skills.

How to get the Rond of Absorption

This attachment can be crafted as soon as you reach Level 6 for 1,000 Divine Ashes. If you wish to upgrade it further, then use the following materials:

  • Level 7 requires 500 Divine Ashes and 1 Blazing Ember, and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 22
    • Runic: 26
  • Level 8 requires 1,000 Divine Ashes and 2 Blazing Embers, and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 25
    • Runic: 30
  • Level 9 requires 1,500 Divine Ashes, 45 Shining Crystals, 30 Dust of Realms and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 29
    • Runic: 34

Rond of Fortification

Rond of Fortification's stats are as follows:

  • Defense: 18

This shield Rond offers nothing but a solid defense that will help you improve your shield and armor.

It may not have any cool offensive tricks like the previous shields, but it does produce a strong explosion that stuns enemies, if you hold the block button for a few seconds.

Rond of Fortification starts at Level 6, just like Rond of Absorption, but it can be improved with:

  • Level 7 requires 7,500 Hacksilver and 2 Luminous Alloy, and has the following stats
    • Defense: 47
  • Level 8 requires 15 Dust of Realms and 3 Luminous Alloy, and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 55
  • Level 9 requires 14,000 Hacksilver, 30 Dust of Realms, 45 Shining Crystals and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 63
How to get the Rond of Fortification

You need to collect some Crystalline Fragments first, and then offer them at the Wishing Well in Vanaheim (indicated on the map above). One of the rewards will include this attachment.

Rond of the Nine Realms

Rond of the Nine Realms' stats are as follows:

  • Defense: 18
  • Luck: 22

In addition to some very decent defense stats, Rond of the Nine Realms is practically a time machine, as it allows players to slow down enemies.

The Realm Shift effect can be easily achieved by simply parrying enemy attacks. Although it may not always work, the chance is still high.

Initially, Rond of the Nine Realms is available at Level 6, and then you can upgrade it using:

  • Level 7 requires 7,500 Hacksilver and 2 Luminous Alloy, and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 22
    • Luck: 26
  • Level 8 requires 10,000 Hacksilver, 3 Dust of Realms, and 15 Luminous Alloy, and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 25
    • Luck: 30
  • Level 9 requires 14,000 Hacksilver, 30 Dust of Realms, 20 Fortified Remnants and has the following stats:
    • Defense: 29
    • Luck: 34
How to get the Rond of the Nine Realms

You will be rewarded with this shield attachment as soon as you complete the "For Vanaheim" favor, which requires players to find Birgir in Vanaheim (Birgir's cave is indicated on the map above).

Those are the best shield Ronds in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Check and Raise Friendship https://www.gameskinny.com/lvr3n/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-check-and-raise-friendship https://www.gameskinny.com/lvr3n/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-check-and-raise-friendship Thu, 01 Dec 2022 09:50:17 -0500 John Schutt

You can still make friends with your Pokemon in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, and hidden buffs await if you choose to do so. The system is a little different this time around, so you'll need to relearn how to check your friendship with a Pokemon as well as how to raise friendship with them

Making friends shouldn't be a stressful process in any situation, so let's go into the details of how to make friends with your Pokemon in Scarlet and Violet.

How to Check Friendship in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Checking on your Pokemon's friendship rating is easy, though you'll need to put in several hours before you reach the NPC who actually does the checking.

In the city of Cascarrafa, there's an NPC on the north side of the central square who calls out, "You friendly with your Pokemon?"

Depending on your friendship score, she'll say something different. Here are all the phrases she'll say based on how friendly you are with your Pokemon.

  • No friendship buildup: "Oh my gosh! What happened between you two?! There's not even a smidge of friendship here!"
  • Very minor friendship buildup: "Are you two just starting to get to know each other? I'm sensing some awkwardness here…"
  • Minor friendship buildup: "You two seem kinda neutral—like you don't mind each other. I hope you get closer!"
  • Moderate friendship buildup: "You're starting to get friendly. I bet you'll get along better soon!"
  • Good friendship buildup: "You're getting along well...but I'm sure you could get way friendlier!"
  • Great friendship buildup: "You're good friends, all right! You definitely enjoy each other's company!"
  • Fantastic friendship buildup: "Wow, you're pretty great friends! You sure mean a lot to each other."
  • Maximum friendship: "Whoa, you're the best friends ever! I can tell just being together gives you warm fuzzies!"

The higher friendship levels also come with unique bonuses, so your investment in your Pokemon goes beyond helping them evolve.

  • With good friendship, your Pokemon has a 10% chance of surviving a hit that would otherwise KO them.
  • At great friendship, your Pokemon have a 15% chance of surviving a hit that would otherwise KO them.
  • At great to maximum friendship, your Pokemon have a 20% chance to heal from a status condition on their own.
  • At maximum friendship, your Pokemon have: a 20% chance to survive a KO, a two-times crit rate and a 10% chance of avoiding any opponent Pokemon's moves.

How to Raise Friendship in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Raising your friendship values with your Pokemon takes much longer than checking it. There's also a cap on how much friendship you can gain by traditional means. There are new ways to improve your friendship in Scarlet and Violet above that cap. We've listed them here.

  • Every level up gives a minor boost to your friendship score up to the cap.
  • Battling a Gym Leader, the Elite Four, or the Champion gives a moderate boost to friendship up to the cap.
  • Walking with your Pokemon in Let's Go gives a slight increase to friendship over time.
  • Feeding a friendship-increasing Berry (Grepa Berry, Hondew Berry, Kelpsy Berry, Pomeg Berry, Qualot Berry, Tamato Berry). Note that these Berries will lower your Pokemon's base stats.
  • Wearing the Soothe Bell provides a static bonus to any Friendship gains you make up to the cap.

There are also ways to lose friendship:

  • If your Pokemon faints.
  • If you use an Energy Root, Energy Powder, or Revival Herb item.

Once you reach the cap and the NPC no longer updates her phrases, there are only two ways to raise friendship to its maximum: feeding your Pokemon sandwiches, playing and washing them, and otherwise interacting with them at picnics.

Whenever you set up a picnic, you can press ZR, the right trigger, to spawn a soccer ball you can kick around with your Pokemon. Going up to any of your team and pressing X will allow you to give them a bath and then a rinse.

If you want to make every one of your Pokemon partners your best friend ever, you'll be spending a lot of time eating with them, playing with them, and bathing them. Return to the NPC to check your progress, and keep up the good fight.

That's about everything you need to know about friendship in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. It's not the most transparent system, and many hidden factors are at play. For more Pokemon content, check out our guides to how to breed and get eggs, how to get Tera Shards, and the best gym order. Our guides hub has more.

]]>
Warhammer 40k: Darktide — What You Need for Power Supply Interruption https://www.gameskinny.com/q84ov/warhammer-40k-darktide-what-you-need-for-power-supply-interruption https://www.gameskinny.com/q84ov/warhammer-40k-darktide-what-you-need-for-power-supply-interruption Wed, 30 Nov 2022 17:49:22 -0500 Ashley Shankle

Warhammer 40,000: Darktide has launched with a healthy variety of missions and Special Conditions, and one such Special Condition should be familiar to pre-order beta players who hate the dark: Power Supply Interruption.

Maybe you've loaded into a mission with the Power Supply Interruption condition, or maybe you're sitting there on the Mourningstar wondering whether you should take up a mission with this Special Condition. In either case, you should know how to prepare yourself for these missions. Well, unless you're playing an Ogryn.

The Power Supply Interruption Special Condition means that there will be no or extremely limited power in the mission area, which means it's going to be pitch black through long portions of the mission and you're not going to be able to see anything without some light. Enter the flashlight.

Surviving Power Supply Interruptions

The first step to surviving a mission with this Special Condition is to not have a team full of Ogryns. Seriously: Ogryns have no light source option. Fitting for their barn-like stature.

The other classes do have flashlight capabilities on certain guns. A firearm with a flashlight has it indicated in its basic info view under Torch to the right, next to the Primary and Secondary Action damage values.

You'll want at least one team member to have a firearm with a torch, which will be on anytime their gun is drawn.This makes engaging in melee more tricky than usual, as swapping to a melee weapon holsters your gun and the precious light it provides in darkness.

Be mindful of Special Conditions when you use Quickplay to match with randoms, particularly to be aware if it's a Hi-Intensity Engagement Zone or a location where there is a Power Supply Interruption. Both can affect the difficulty severely, and could result in a wipe and loss. Low-Intensity Engagement Zones are also now in the game, having the opposite effect.

We've got more Darktide guides coming as the co-op shooter launches and beyond.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Where to Get Dusk Stone https://www.gameskinny.com/jn7ok/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-where-to-get-dusk-stone https://www.gameskinny.com/jn7ok/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-where-to-get-dusk-stone Wed, 30 Nov 2022 09:56:59 -0500 Sergey_3847

Dusk Stone is one of the 10 evolution stones in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. These items are needed for certain Pokemon evolutions, but finding them may not be as easy as it seems.

This guide will show you where to get Dusk Stone in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, including how to get it as a random drop, guaranteed drop, and reward.

How to Get Dusk Stone

As a Random Drop

Just like several other evolution stones in Scarlet and Violet, Dusk Stone can be found randomly as loot or dropped by NPCs in Area Three of the West Province.

As Guaranteed Drops

Cascarrafa Drop

While checking the West Province is fine if you're already there and completing other tasks, nothing random is as efficient as something guaranteed. Instead, focus on the southeast portion of Cascarrafa for guaranteed drops.

Approach the spot located next to a small hill, as indicated by the marker on the map above, and there you may find a Red Pokeball, which contains Dusk Stone.

Montenevera Drop

One more guaranteed spot for Dusk Stone is the Montenevera Gym located in the Montenevera town of the northern region.

Players need to go behind the gym building and pick up a Red Pokeball. The Dusk Stone is contained within the Pokeball.

As a Reward

Porto Miranda Auctions

Another way of obtaining Dusk Stone is to win the bid at the Porto Miranda Auction. To do so, you'll need to place the highest possible bid on the Dusk Stone lot, eventually winning it as a reward.

Auctions at Porto Miranda become available after you complete Cascarrafa's Gym challenges. Since the lots at the auction change constantly, you can reroll them by restarting your game and changing the date on your console.

Pokedex Reward

Dusk Stone can also be obtained after collecting 130 Pokemon in your Pokedex collection. Once you have the required number of Pokemon, go to the "Pokedex" menu of the game, and press the "X" button to claim your Dusk Stone as a reward.

Dusk Stone Pokemon Evolutions

There are two types of Pokemon that use Dusk Stone for evolutions, including:

  • Murkrow into Honchkrow.
  • Misdreavus into Mismagius.

That's all you need to know on where to get Dusk Stone in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. For more Pokemon Scarlet and Violet tips and tricks articles, head over to our dedicated guides hub.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Breed Pokemon and Get Eggs https://www.gameskinny.com/zgoit/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-breed-pokemon-and-get-eggs https://www.gameskinny.com/zgoit/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-breed-pokemon-and-get-eggs Wed, 30 Nov 2022 09:53:41 -0500 Hayes Madsen

Breeding has been a major part of the Pokemon series since generation two with Gold and Silver, and that's more true than ever with Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

Breeding in Scarlet and Violet works a bit differently from previous generations, with it taking place over picnics. In this guide, we'll go over how to breed Pokemon, how the egg system works, and how to increase Egg Power in the latest Pokemon releases.

How to Breed Pokemon in Scarlet and Violet

Pokemon breeding is now done entirely through picnics, not daycares like in previous games. The only thing you need to breed is two Pokemon, one male and one female, that belong in the same Egg Group.

If you're unfamiliar with Egg Groups they essentially correspond to the look of a Pokemon. There are fourteen main Egg Groups, and just like with type Pokemon can belong to multiple groups.

Here's a list of Egg Groups, and sites like Bulbapedia have more detailed information on which Pokemon belong to which groups. 

  • Monster 
  • Human 1
  • Water 1
  • Water 2
  • Water 3
  • Bug
  • Mineral
  • Flying
  • Amorphous
  • Field
  • Fairy
  • Undiscovered
  • Grass
  • Dragon

As long as you have Pokemon that can breed together, eggs will slowly start appearing in your picnic basket. You can check how many eggs are in the basket by walking up and interacting with it. Your basket can hold roughly ten eggs at a time, and any Pokemon that are able to breed will do so. Because of that, you might be better off only having two Pokemon in your party. 

There are a couple extra things you'll want to keep in mind with breeding. If two Pokemon are different species, the Pokemon that hatches from the egg will be the species of the mother. The same applies to inheriting moves, as moves from the mother are more likely to be inherited than moves from the father. Additionally, Ditto can breed with any Pokemon of any gender or species. 

Finally, some Pokemon have Egg Moves that can only be learned through breeding with a Pokemon that has the move. While breeding is usually involved, you can actually teach Pokemon Egg Moves by having them hold a Mirror Herb and having an empty move slot. Mirror Herbs can be purchased from Delibird Presents for 3,000 money. 

There is actually a way to increase the frequency of eggs during picnics, which is by increasing your Egg Power.

How Egg Power Works in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Egg Power is a new mechanic in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, which is gained by having picnics and eating food. To get Egg Power you'll need to make a sandwich with ingredients that grant you the status, which typically includes apples, bananas, pineapples, strawberries, kiwi, marmalade, olive, oil, cream cheese, whipped cream, and more.

Of course, if you'd rather not make your own sandwiches you can head to any city and find a plethora of restaurants.

Much like other meal benefits, Egg Power has different levels, and the higher the level the more likely you'll be to get eggs while picnicking. Just keep in mind that benefits from sandwiches only last for 30 minutes.

How to Hatch Eggs in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Hatching an egg is just as simple as it's always been, as all you need to do is keep it in your party for a requisite amount of time. The egg will take up your party slots, but simply walk around with it and eventually, you'll have a brand new Pokemon.

Luckily, there are certain Pokemon that have moves that can speed up the process of egg-hatching. These moves are:

  • Flame Body
  • Magma Armor
  • Steam Engine

 

Now you should have a better idea of how to breed Pokemon and hatch eggs. For even more tips and help, make sure to take a look at our Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides hub

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Check IVs https://www.gameskinny.com/mdlpn/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-check-ivs https://www.gameskinny.com/mdlpn/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-check-ivs Wed, 30 Nov 2022 09:37:49 -0500 John Schutt

Combat in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet is a relatively simple premise on its own. Every creature has one or two types, which have strengths and weaknesses. Pokemon are also good at attacking using either Special or Normal attacks, and they have other defensive and Speed stats to back them up. There is, however, a second set of hidden stats called individual values or IVs, that determine how a Pokemon's stats will grow on top of its nature doing the same.

IVs have long been instrumental for Pokemon battling at the higher levels, with the best Trainers spending countless hours breeding teams with optimal IVs. A squad of Pokemon with the best possible IVs will outshine an identical one without them. It wasn't easy to check IVs for many generations, though the community developed methods. Pokemon Scarlet and Violet have a handy mechanic for doing just that. Find out how to unlock it here.

Pokemon Scarlet and Violet Individual Values Explained

For most of your playthrough, you'll be unable to check IVs beyond making educated guesses as you raise your team. If you're leveling two of the same Pokemon with the exact nature and one is seeing better gains than the other, the Pokemon with superior stats has better overall IVs.

After you finish the Victory Road quest, defeat the Elite Four and the Champion, and have another fight with Nemona, you earn an item called the Hall of Fame Badge. With this badge, you earn the ability to Judge your Pokemon, a mechanic explained if you visit any Pokemon Center nurse in Paldea.

Activating it is simple. Go into your Boxes and hover over the Pokemon whose IVs you want to check. Then press the + button on your Switch twice. Doing that will change the Pokemon's stat screen, adding descriptors next to each statistic. These vary from Best to Decent, etc., dictating which stats have the best Individual Values.

IVs are entirely separate from a Pokemon's nature, so you might have a Pokemon that specializes in the Attack stat and has an Attack nature, but its Attack IV is trash. The opposite is also true. Ideally, you want as many of the members of your team as possible to have stats in the Best category, though you should prioritize a Pokemon's strengths before boosting its weaknesses.

There's much more granularity to the IV system in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, but you can now start the essentially endless grind for a team with a perfect set of Individual Values with the power to check them on command. While you do, check out our other Pokemon guides, including how to get Tera Shards, the best Gym order, and more in our guides hub.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Where to Find Eevee https://www.gameskinny.com/180h3/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-where-to-find-eevee https://www.gameskinny.com/180h3/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-where-to-find-eevee Wed, 30 Nov 2022 09:29:37 -0500 John Schutt

Eevee is one of the franchise's most iconic monsters, and while finding one in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet will prove difficult, it's always a good idea to seek them out. We'll cover all the places to find Eevee in this guide.

Eevee's evolved forms are some of the better options in their Normal type class, with Espeon, Vaporeon, and Sylveon being just some of the standouts. However, finding Eevee in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet will prove difficult; they're only available in a select few locations and not very often. 

Eevee Locations in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

It doesn't take long to start your quest for Eevee in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, as one of the only places you'll find them in all of Paldea is in the fields west and north of the town of Cortondo. Coincidentally, Cortondo is home to the Bug Gym, the first gym on the critical path. You can get there by traveling west from Los Platos. The road takes you straight there.

Once you arrive in Cortondo, head to the grassy fields west of the town and wander about. Eevee are an incredibly rare spawn here, but this is the best place to find them, as they'll be low enough level that you can quickly train them while raising their Friendship score. Trained Pokemon are always stronger than wild-caught ones, and you can also get a better feel for how they play.

There's a small spot north of town as well, but it's only worth checking if you want a change of scenery, as its tiny size makes farming for Eevee something of a crapshoot.

You can also find Eevee immediately around the city of Medali in the northwest portion of the map. As with Cortondo, the spawn rate near Medali is very low, so don't expect to find three or four Eevees wandering close to one another. Pokemon around Medali are around levels 25-30 or so, meaning you'll have to work harder to train any Eevee you find.

If you want to maximize the spawn possibilities for Eevee, get yourself a Sandwich with the Encounter Power: Normal ability. This will increase the number of Normal-type spawns in your immediate area, which will vastly increase your chances of an Eevee showing up.

If you don't have any luck finding Eevee out in the wild, you can always hope to get lucky with a Tera Raid Battle. Outside of special events, there's always a small chance either the PokePortal or the various crystals in your world will have a Terastal Eevee. Unless you want large Experience Candies, it's probably best to go for a low-star Raid for better overall stats. Should you get a high-level Eevee, you can certainly use it for breeding your perfect evolution in the long run.

That's about it for finding Eevee in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Expect to be looking long and hard if your luck isn't the best. The reward is well worth the toil, as the various Eeveelutions are some of the best mid-late game options and can be good at any level if appropriately trained. We've covered other Pokemon topics here, including the best gym order, how to get Tera Shards, and more in our Scarlet and Violet guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Flower Locations Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/leafl/god-of-war-ragnarok-flower-locations-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/leafl/god-of-war-ragnarok-flower-locations-guide Tue, 29 Nov 2022 11:49:10 -0500 Sergey_3847

God of War: Ragnarok players can help Freya find the nine flowers scattered all over the Nine Realms during the "Nine Realms of Bloom" favor. Note that many flowers become available only when the story campaign is over.

This guide will show you all flower locations in God of War: Ragnarok, including the conditions required for finding them.

Flower Location #1: Sparkthorn

You can initiate the "Nine Realms of Bloom" favor by collecting the first flower at Nidavellir in Svartalfheim. The Sparkthorn flower becomes available after you complete the 10th story mission, "Forging Destiny".

It can be seen right outside on the street near one of the houses, indicated on the map above. Let Freya pick it up, and then you can go find the rest of the flowers across the Nine Realms.

Flower Location #2: Dawnbloom

The next flower can be seen at the foot of the mountain in The Forbidden Sands of Alfheim.

Dawnbloom will appear only when players complete the "Song of the Sands" favor, which requires players to find Hafgufa and destroy its bindings.

Flower Location #3: Ashpetal

The third flower can be found on the ground in The Crucible at Muspelheim. Ashpetal will appear only after players collect both halves of the Muspelheim Seed in Svartalfheim.

Flower Location #4: Soulblossom

The fourth flower can be obtained at Hel's Perch in Helheim next to a dead body. The Soulblossom will appear once you defeat the boss of the area Garm, who unlocks the passage to the area.

Flower Location #5: Starblush

The next flower can be found on the narrow path in the south of The Sinkholes in Vanaheim. Starblush becomes available after you complete the "Return of the River" favor, which requires you to flood the jungle.

Flower Location #6: Ironbell

The sixth flower can be seen at the Angrboda's Treehouse in Jotunheim.

Ironbell can be obtained only when you complete God of War: Ragnarok's main story. If you've done so, travel to Sindri's House and speak to Ratatoskr to unlock this fast travel point.

Flower Location #7: Mirkweed

Mirkweed can be found next to a giant turtle statue at the Sanctuary Grove in Midgard. The fast travel point becomes available after speaking to Ratatoskr when the story is finished.

Flower Location #8: Frostfinger

The same goes for Frostfinger, which becomes available after talking to Ratatoskr at the end of the story campaign. You can find the flower in Mist Fields of Niflheim.

Flower Location #9: Dreamshade

The ninth and final flower can be found inside a prison cell of the Aesir Prison Wreckage in Niflheim. This area also becomes available once you complete the story campaign of the game.

Nine Realms of Bloom Rewards

Once you find all nine flowers, you will receive the following rewards:

  • 750 XP (Kratos).
  • 750 XP (Freya).

Those are all flower locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Stag Locations Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/0e8z1/god-of-war-ragnarok-stag-locations-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/0e8z1/god-of-war-ragnarok-stag-locations-guide Mon, 28 Nov 2022 13:33:33 -0500 Sergey_3847

While exploring Vanaheim during the late-game of God of War: Ragnarok, you may encounter some stags. If you interact with one of them, this will trigger a new favor, "A Stag for All Seasons", which is given by Ratatoskr. It will require you to return all the stags to Yggdrasil for some special rewards.

This guide will provide you with all stag locations in God of War: Ragnarok.

How to Start A Stag for All Seasons Favor

After you have completed the 13th story mission, "Creatures of Prophecy," and the favor, "Scent of Survival," you will unlock The Crater area of Vanaheim.

Then, you can travel to the Sindri's House and speak to Ratatoskr to initiate the favor. After that, you need to locate all stags and interact with them.

Stag Location #1

All stags can be found in The Crater region of Vanaheim. The first one can be seen in the southeast of The Plains area.

Stag Location #2

The second one roams in the mountains between The Sinkholes and The Jungle.

Stag Location #3

The third stag can be encountered on the river bank just north of The Jungle.

Stag Location #4

The fourth one can be seen on top of a cliff across the river north of The Jungle.

Stag Location #5

The fifth and final stag can be seen standing in a small river valley to the south of The Sinkholes.

A Stag for All Seasons Rewards

Once you return all the stags to Ratatoskr, players will receive the following rewards:

  • 4,500 XP (Kratos).
  • 1,125 XP (Freya).
  • 75 Whispering Slabs.
  • Rond of Disruption.

Those are all stag locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Troll Locations Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/jpo4h/god-of-war-ragnarok-troll-locations-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/jpo4h/god-of-war-ragnarok-troll-locations-guide Mon, 28 Nov 2022 13:24:08 -0500 Sergey_3847

The Steinbjorn armor is considered one of the best armor sets in God of War: Ragnarok. To craft the set, you will need to obtain four Slumber Stones, which can be obtained only by slaying Trolls.

This guide will show you all troll locations in God of War: Ragnarok and include tips on how to summon them.

How to Get the Mystical Heirloom Relic

Before you can defeat the Trolls, you need to find the Mystical Heirloom relic required to summon them.

You can find the Mystical Heirloom next to the Tyr's Temple in Midgard. Go to the spot indicated on the map above and destroy a snow wall in front of you. This will reveal a secret passage. Enter the passage, and pick up the Mystical Heirloom from the dead body on the ground.

Troll Location #1

The first Troll statue can be found at the outer wall of The Derelict Outpost in Midgard. Approach the statue, equip the Mystical Heirloom relic, and press L1 + Circle to summon the Troll.

You can defeat the Troll using the Draupnir Spear. Once it's dead, you will be rewarded with the first Slumber Stone.

Troll Locations #2-3

Two other Troll Statues can be found just outside Noatun's Garden in Vanaheim. You'll have a tough fight on your hands between both Trolls. At the end of the fight, each will drop a Slumber Stone, which should be your second and third.

Troll Location #4

The fourth and final Troll statue can be located at the edge of the cliff in The Forbidden Sands of Alfheim. When this final Troll is dead, you can take all four Slumber Stones and visit a blacksmith to craft a full Steinbjorn armor set for you.

Those are all Troll locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
Tactics Ogre: Reborn — Starting Choices Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/880i1/tactics-ogre-reborn-starting-choices-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/880i1/tactics-ogre-reborn-starting-choices-guide Mon, 28 Nov 2022 13:10:44 -0500 Sergey_3847

All Tactics Ogre: Reborn players will have to go through a series of starting choices and questions at the beginning of the game from the Starseer Warren, who will pose these riddles in the form of tarot cards with three possible answers to each one. The selected answers will determine the starting stats of your character.

This guide will provide you with all starting choices and questions in Tactics Ogre: Reborn, so you can quickly determine which stats will be the basis of your desired build.

All Tarot Cards and Starting Questions

You will be asked seven questions in total. The first one is easy and requires you to provide the birth date of your character, and the last question will determine your strongest element represented by one of the goddesses.

But the most important questions are between two and five, as that's where you will be given random tarot card choices. These answers will determine your stats, and thus the entire build of your character.

Here is a complete list of all tarot cards with starting questions, as well as answers with a complete breakdown of stats:

Tarot Card: The Fool

Question: "You are about to embark on a long journey. Whom do you want at your side?"

Answer #1: "My family."

  • +4 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #2: "My beloved."

  • +1 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence

Answer #3: "My friend."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Tarot Card: The Magician

Question: "You brew an arcane elixir. What power will it hold?"

Answer #1: "Order and obedience."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #2: "Concession and regret."

  • +3 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #3: "Liberty and turmoil."

  • +4 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Tarot Card: The High Priestess

Question: "All men have flaws. Which of yours would you remedy?"

Answer #1: "My sloth."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility

Answer #2: "My envy."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #3: "My pride."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Empress

Question: "In what things do you stand above all others?"

Answer #1: "My beauty."

  • +5 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Answer #2: "My wealth."

  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #3: "My wisdom."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Tarot Card: The Emperor

Question: "The people of your kingdom rise against you. What course do you take?"

Answer #1: "Treat for peace."

  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +2 Mind

Answer #2: "Rally my armies."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance

Answer #3: "Abdicate the throne."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence

Tarot Card: The Hierophant

Question: "Of the many evils men do, which is the most damning?"

Answer #1: "Deceiving others."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Answer #2: "Sacrificing others."

  • +4 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #3: "Stealing from others."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Lovers

Question: "What do you seek in a lover?"

Answer #1: "Wisdom and ability."

  • +1 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence

Answer #2: "Wealth and power."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Mind
  • +3 Resistance

Answer #3: "Youth and beauty."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind
  • +1 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Chariot

Question: "How do you define victory?"

Answer #1: "Vanquishing my foes."

  • +3 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #2: "Ending the conflict."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +3 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #3: "Preserving my allies."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Mind

Tarot Card: Strength

Question: "All men hold darkness in their hearts. What lurks in yours?"

Answer #1: "Vengeance for family."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #2: "Vengeance for friends."

  • +4 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Answer #3: "Vengeance for country."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind
  • +2 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Hermit

Question: "A sage will grant you a single piece of wisdom. What would you learn from him?"

Answer #1: "The secret of wealth."

  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #2: "The secret of victory."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #3: "The secret of winning hearts."

  • +4 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Tarot Card: Wheel of Fortune

Question: "You stand at the end of a hard-fought battle. Whay have your forces lost?"

Answer #1: "Inadequate troops."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance

Answer #2: "Poor leadership."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Answer #3: "Ill luck."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Tarot Card: Justice

Question: "How would you bring together two disparate clans?"

Answer #1: "By force."

  • +4 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #2: "By religion."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence

Answer #3: "By diplomacy."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility

Tarot Card: The Hanged Man

Question: "You stand poised to take the life of another. Why do you attempt this dire act?"

Answer #1: "To satisfy revenge."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Mind
  • +3 Resistance

Answer #2: "To defend my honor."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #3: "To defend my life."

  • +5 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Tarot Card: Death

Question: "In the final reckoning, who will prove false?"

Answer #1: "My king."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +3 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #2: "My beloved."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #3: "My dearest friend."

  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Intelligence

Tarot Card: Temperance

Question: "Your reckless plan has ended in disaster. What has it cost you?"

Answer #1: "My friends and beloved."

  • +4 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Answer #2: "My position and honor."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +2 Vitality
  • +2 Mind

Answer #3: "My family and fortune."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Tarot Card: The Devil

Question: "A devil will grant you any wish...for a price. What are you willing to endure?"

Answer #1: "Grotesque disfigurement."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #2: "Complete isolation."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #3: "Relentless fear."

  • +1 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence

Tarot Card: The Tower

Question: "A fire engulfs your home. Whom do you save from the flames?"
Answer #1: "My beloved."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Answer #2: "My child."

  • +4 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #3: "My parents."

  • +3 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Star

Question: "Stars shoot across the sky. For what do you wish?"
Answer #1: "Success for my friends."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence

Answer #2: "Happiness for myself."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Answer #3: "Peace for the world."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Resistance

Tarot Card: The Moon

Question: "In a fit of passion, you take your friend's lover. What will you do next?"

Answer #1: "Keep the lover for my own."

  • +2 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #2: "Savor the moment."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Vitality
  • +1 Dexterity
  • +2 Agility

Answer #3: "Put it out my mind."

  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind

Tarot Card: The Sun

Question: "You stand at the end of a hard-fought battle. To what do you owe your victory?"

Answer #1: "My own ability."

  • +5 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind
  • +1 Resistance

Answer #2: "The strength of my allies."

  • +5 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance
  • +2 Mind

Answer #3: "The grace of god."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +1 Avoidance

Tarot Card: Judgement

Question: "The man who slew your family stands chained before you. What Punishment will you mete out?"

Answer #1: "Imprisonment."

  • +1 HP
  • +1 Strength
  • +2 Vitality
  • +2 Mind

Answer #2: "Beheading."

  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +2 Mind

Answer #3: "Banishment."

  • +4 HP
  • +2 Strength
  • +1 Vitality
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +2 Resistance

Tarot Card: The World

Question: "What is god to you?"

Answer #1: "An exemplar."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Agility
  • +1 Intelligence
  • +1 Mind
  • +2 Resistance

Answer #2: "A weapon."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Agility
  • +2 Avoidance
  • +1 Mind

Answer #3: "An illusion."

  • +2 HP
  • +2 Dexterity
  • +1 Mind
  • +3 Resistance

Those are all starting choices in Tactics Ogre: Reborn. You can also read our official Tactics Ogre: Reborn review right here as well as check out our character recruitment guide.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Get Tera Shards https://www.gameskinny.com/5u1ff/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-tera-shards https://www.gameskinny.com/5u1ff/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-tera-shards Mon, 28 Nov 2022 11:40:41 -0500 Hayes Madsen

Terrastalization is the unique new gimmick of Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, letting Pokemon turn into a crystallized form in the middle of battle to boost their power and can even change their type. But you'll need Tera Shards to do so.

Each Pokemon has a set Tera type, but for players that really want ultimate control over their party, you can actually alter a Pokemon's Tera type with a bit of work. With that in mind, here's how to get Tera Shards in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

Tera Shards Explained

Terrastalized Pokemon can be found out in the wild, and if you defeat them, you can get a small amount of Tera crystals. However, finding wild Terrastalized Pokemon is unreliable at best, and even when you do find them, you won't know what type of crystals you're getting until they're defeated.

Tera Raid Battles are the better source of Tera Shards, and they can be found all over the map. If you open up your map, you'll see a ton of little icons that look like the type symbols, and each of these is a Tera Raid Battle with a Pokemon of that specific type, meaning you'll get those specific crystals if you win. However, the number of Tera Crystals you get is entirely depending upon the star ranking of the battle. You can see how it shakes out below. 

  • One-Star Battle — 0 Tera Shards.
  • Two-Star Battle — 0 Tera Shards.
  • Three-Star Battle — 2 Tera Shards.
  • Four-Star Battle — 3 Tera Shards.
  • Five-Star Battle — 4 Tera Shards.
  • Six-Star Battle — 6 Tera Shards.

Your ability to get Tera Shards will obviously go up as you progress through the game and level up your team. Now once you've collected the shards, you need to know how to use them. 

How to Use Tera Shards

Tera Shards are sued to change the Tera-type of a Pokemon, and once you have 50 of a specific type of shard, you can change a Pokemon to that type.

To change a Pokemon's Tera type, head to the town of Medali and go to the Treasure Eatery, the restaurant right next to the Medali (East) Pokemon Center. Of course, to use this feature, you'll need to have beaten the Medali gym leader, Larry

Once you've done that and you have enough shards, simply head into the restaurant and talk to the chef to change the Tera-type of whichever Pokemon you want. 

That's everything you need to know about Tera Shards in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. For more tips and help, make sure to take a look at our Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides hub

]]>
Soulstone Survivors: How to Unlock Endless Cycle https://www.gameskinny.com/76jsx/soulstone-survivors-how-to-unlock-endless-cycle https://www.gameskinny.com/76jsx/soulstone-survivors-how-to-unlock-endless-cycle Mon, 28 Nov 2022 09:35:46 -0500 Sergey_3847

Different challenges allow Soulstone Survivors players unlock various classes. Two of them, the Chaoswalker and the Legionnaire, can be unlocked only in Endless Cycle mode. You've got to unlock Endless Cycle itself before aiming for these two classes. Let's go into how to do just that.

Beat the Arena! Fast!

You won't be seeing Endless Cycle in the menus without unlocking it, but it will be visible once you unlock it. How do you do it? By clearing the Arena in under 13 minutes.

Completing the Arena in such a short time takes skill and luck, but it is possible with some resilience. Here are some tips on how to clear it within the 13-minute timeframe:

  • Use the strongest build you can. Your character needs to be very strong in order to defeat all five bosses and all the waves of the enemies in between in a single Arena. You can find our guide of the best builds in Soulstone Survivors right here.
  • Choose the best abilities. Upgrading your skill tree is of high importance not just to be able to enter the Endless Cycle mode, but also to survive in it.
  • Upgrade your weapons. Visit blacksmith as often as possible, and upgrade your weapons for higher damage.
  • Choose better runes. Remember that any build can be improved with runes that enhance certain abilities of your class. You can use our guide for all runes in Soulstone Survivors right here.

Once you've been able to complete the Arena in the designated time window, you will see three portals of different colors appear in front of you:

  • Blue Portal finishes the game.
  • Red Portal takes you to Overlord Mode.
  • Purple Portal takes you to Endless Cycle.

You need to choose the Purple Portal in order to unlock the Endless Cycle mode. Once you're inside, the first cycle begins, which is basically a slightly more difficult Arena. If you beat it, the second cycle begins, and so on.

Note that finished Endless Cycle 2 unlocks the Chaoswalker, and Endless Cycle 3 unlocks the Legionnaire.

That's all you need to know on how to unlock Endless Cycle in Soulstone Survivors. You can also check out the rest of our Soulstone Survivors tips and tricks articles right here.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Ice Stone Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/7ijot/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-ice-stone-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/7ijot/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-ice-stone-locations Mon, 28 Nov 2022 09:21:20 -0500 Sergey_3847

Evolutions requiring elemental stones are nothing new to the Pokemon series. The Ice Stone is required for three evolutions in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, the most notable and obvious being Glaceon from Eevee.

This guide will show you where to get Ice Stone in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, guaranteed, and where you can get it as a battle reward for key enemies.

Ice Stone as Random Loot

Believe it or not, Ice Stones aren't particularly rare in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. You just need to keep your eyes open on Glaceado Mountain.

Across Glaceado Mountain are randomized sparkling spots just begging for you to gather from them and potentially get an Ice Stone. Poke Balls scattered throughout the region may also have Ice Stones, so be sure to gather what you can when exploring the area.

Inside Dalizapa Passage

The fastest way to get an Ice Stone is in Dalizapa Passage cave. Climb your way up (or jump, whatever works) the northern portion of the cave until you come across a Poke Ball. Loot it and an Ice Stone will be yours.

Ice Stone as a Reward

Lastly, players can obtain an Ice Stone after successfully completing the Blizzard Course on the Snow Slope Run, which can be accessed at Glaceado Gym (indicated on the map above).

Note that the course becomes available only after you complete the Glaceado's Gym Battle, which requires you to beat Grusha gym leader. Then, you need to complete the Powder Snow Course, and finally you can do the Blizzard Course, which rewards an Ice Stone.

Ice Stone Pokemon Evolutions

There are three types of Pokemon that use Ice Stone for evolutions, including:

  • Eevee into Glaceon.
  • Crabrawler into Crabominable.
  • Cetoddle into Cetitan.

That's all you need to know on where to get Ice Stone in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Fore more Pokemon Scarlet and Violet tips and tricks articles, please visit our dedicated hub page.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Best Gym Order https://www.gameskinny.com/eyz6r/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-gym-order https://www.gameskinny.com/eyz6r/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-gym-order Fri, 25 Nov 2022 14:40:41 -0500 John Schutt

Gym Leaders are the classic challenge gauntlet across the Pokemon games, and that hasn’t changed with Scarlet and Violet. There are additional activities that award badges — hunting Titan Pokemon and taking down Team Star — but you aren’t going to face the Elite Four and the Champion without defeating Paldea’s eight Gym Leaders first. With that in mind, you'll want to know the best gym order.

You start your Pokemon adventure in the southern regions of Paldea. However, until you defeat the Open Sky Titan in the western part of the map and unlock the ability to swim, you won’t be able to take on any Gym Leaders north of the river separating the continent’s two halves. As such, you only have access to two Gyms from the get-go, but once you can swim, the world is your oyster.

We’ve listed the best Gym order based on the level of each Leader’s ace, the Pokémon they’ll Terastallize, but we’ll also list the level of the other members of their team.

Gym Leaders Order

Katy: Cortondo Gym

Katy is a Bug type specialist and can challenge any Trainer who takes her on unprepared. Her ace is a level 15 Teddiursa with Bug as its Tera Type and Fury Cutter on tap, a move that quickly ramps up in power as it’s used.

Her other two Pokemon — Nymble and Tarountula — are both level 14, and while they don’t have as much raw power, they can pose a problem to underleveled teams.

Brassius: Atrazon Gym

Brassius is all about Grass Pokemon, but his ace, a level 17 Sudowoodo, has the Grass Tera Type, completely negating the weaknesses that come with Rock. It still has Rock Throw if you try to counter it with a Flying or Fire type, and the Grass move Trailblaze for additional coverage.

His other two Pokémon are a level 16 Petilil and Smolive, which Flying and Fire should make quick work of, but if you aren’t careful, they can also put you in a tough spot.

Iono: Levincia Gym

The battle against Iono can be something of a shock to the system as she brings four Pokemon to the fight, two of them in their final evolutionary forms. Her ace is a level 24 Electric Tera Type Mismagius that’s immune to Ground attacks thanks to its Levitate ability.

It also loses its weakness to Ghost moves when it Terastallizes, meaning no move in all of Pokemon can do super effective damage. The rest of her team are all level 23 and consist of the Electric/Flying Wattrel and the pure Electric Bellibolt and Luxio.

Kofu: Cascarrafa Gym

Kofu is something of a break from the tough Gym challenges, as his ace is a level 30 Water Tera Type Crabominable and has none of the mean weakness negation as the previous sets of Gyms.

His ace also doesn’t have any direct counters to the Grass or Electric types that will bring it to its knees, so the main hurdle you need to overcome is the level difference. His other Pokemon are level 29: the Water/Psychic Veluza and pure Water Wugtrio. If you picked Sprigatito as your starter or have another good Grass or Electric-type on your team, you should have no issues taking Kufo down.

Larry: Medali Gym

Don’t let Larry’s unassuming appearance fool you. His team can put on some serious hurt if you let them. His ace, in particular, a level 36 Staraptor, can take out every Pokemon you have if you give it a chance. Worse, you don’t want to apply any status effects to it, as its Facade move doubles in power while it’s Poisoned, Burned, or Paralyzed, so bring a Fighting-type like Lucario, Pawmo, or Annihilape as a counter.

Don’t underestimate Larry’s level 35 Komala or Dundunsparse either, as their Attack stats can knock out even the hardiest Pokémon.

Ryme: Montenevera Gym

Ryme is all about Ghost types, which are only weak to other Ghost or Dark attacks. Her ace, a level 42 Ghost Tera Type Toxtricity, doesn’t have much to counter a Dark-type Pokémon, but its access to the Hex attack puts other Ghosts on notice.

Its Discharge attacks also gives it some additional coverage. As you fight Ryme in a Double Battle, you’ll always be facing one of her other level 41 Pokémon, which include the pure Ghost Banette and Houndstone and the Ghost/Fairy Mimikyu. Watch out for Houndstone’s Play Rough, a Fairy-type attack that can be a real problem for any Dark-types you’ve brought to the battle.

Tulip: Alfronada Gym

Specializing in Psychic Pokémon, Tulip can be a serious roadblock if you don’t have anything to counter that historically extra-strong type. Her ace, a level 45 Psychic Tera Type Florges, uses the Psychic attack and Moonblast, a 95 Power Fairy-type move perfect for countering any Dark-types you bring to the fight.

Its third move, Petal Blast, covers a lot of additional ground. The rest of her team — a level 44 Farigiraf, Gardevoir, and Espathra — are easier to deal with, but they all have something to deal with Psychic’s weakness. Farigiraf is part Normal, negating Ghost, Gardevoir has Dazzling Gleam for Dark, and Espathra has Shadow Ball for Ghost as well.

Grusha: Glaseado Mountain Gym

Ice Types are not historically the most powerful in Pokemon, but Scarlet and Violet added several bruisers to the mix. Grusha takes full advantage of Tera Typing and the best the Ice type offers.

His ace, a level 48 Ice Tera Type Altaria, which retails its weakness to Rock and gains a Fire vulnerability, doesn’t have any direct counters to its Fire weakness, is still a force to be reckoned with. Don’t count the rest of his team out, as the level 47 Frosmoth, Beartic, and Cetitan can all dish out damage against any Pokémon unlucky enough to be even a few levels under them.

Hopefully, that list of Gym Leaders gives you a solid foundation to start building a team to take them down. You are, of course, welcome to challenge the Gyms in any order you wish, and there is something to be said for exploring your way to overpowered. That’s part of enjoying an open world RPG, after all.

However, if your goal is to make your way through Pokemon Scarlet and Violet and defeat leaders in the most efficient way possible, the Gym order presented here is a great way to do that. For more on the latest Pokemon title, check out our guides to the best Titan order and how to get the Amulet Coin. Our guides hub has more content to enjoy, and we’ll be adding plenty to it in the days to come.

]]>
Pokémon Scarlet and Violet: How to Unlock the Swim Upgrade https://www.gameskinny.com/i9wmk/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-unlock-the-swim-upgrade https://www.gameskinny.com/i9wmk/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-unlock-the-swim-upgrade Fri, 25 Nov 2022 14:16:46 -0500 John Schutt

The world of Pokemon Scarlet and Violet is vast, and there are many rivers, lakes, and other bodies of water scattered about or separating parts of the Paldean continent from one another. Naturally, you'll want to know how to swim sooner rather than later, but it will take some time before you unlock the ability.

How to Unlock the Swim Upgrade in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

Almost all of the traversal mechanics in Scarlet and Violet come from your Koraidon or Miradidon, and swimming is no exception. However, unlocking their swimming upgrade will take a little while, as all traversal abilities are locked behind the giant Titan Pokemon around the map. To earn the ability to swim, you need to defeat the Open Sky Titan, a huge version of the Flying/Dark Pokémon Bombirdier.

You’ll find the Open Sky Titan in the far western portion of the map, and you’ll need to navigate your way up a mountain, dodging falling boulders the whole way. Do so successfully, and you’ll reach where the Titan roosts.

Fighting Bombirdier is a battle of attrition taking place across two phases. In the first phase, you’ll need to reduce its HP to about 1/10, at which point the fight will end, and the Titan will retreat to its lair, but not before eating some Herba Mystica and powering itself up.

The second phase sees you trying to make the Titan faint, and you’ll have your friend Arven with you as support. Fighting Bombirdier is like fighting any other Flying Pokémon: bring Electric or Rock types, and if you’ve managed to snag a Fairy type, use that as well. It’s also weak to Ice, but those Pokémon are harder to come by in the early game.

You can use either Special Attacks or standard Attacks, as while Bombirdier doesn’t have the best stats in the world, its Defense and Special Defense are the same.

When you finally defeat the Open Sky Titan, a cutscene will play where Arven makes a sandwich with the Herba Mystica, which you can then give to Koraidon or Miraidon, unlocking their ability to swim. You can then use your newfound skills to cross the river in eastern Paldea and reach much more of the map.

Aside from learning how to swim, there are plenty of other things to discover in this Pokemon iteration. Check out our other Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides.

]]>
Tactics Ogre: Reborn — Best Classes Tier List https://www.gameskinny.com/69ynb/tactics-ogre-reborn-best-classes-tier-list https://www.gameskinny.com/69ynb/tactics-ogre-reborn-best-classes-tier-list Fri, 25 Nov 2022 14:12:29 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are more than 50 different classes in Tactics Ogre: Reborn. The most powerful ones are the unique classes that can be used only by certain characters. However, there are a few generic classes that have some real uses.

This guide will provide you with a tier list of the best classes in Tactics Ogre: Reborn, including tips on how to unlock them.

S-Tier Classes

Lord

  • Type: Unique.

Although Lord can be used only by one character in the game, Denam Pavel, he is still considered the only true best class in Tactics Ogre: Reborn.

He can use all types of support skills, elemental magic, including Draconic, and a number of powerful melee skills, too. What's unusual about it is that Lord is primarily a heavy fighter, who can use all types of spells.

Lord can also equip almost all types of melee weapons, including swords, daggers, axes, spears, and many others, as well as ranged weapons, such as bows and crossbows.

How to unlock Lord

This class can be unlocked only after all the battles at Barnicia are over and you've chosen not to keep Catiua alive.

Rune Fencer (Valkyrie)

  • Type: Generic.

Rune Fencer may not be everybody's cup of tea, but one cannot deny the sheer versatility of this class. Humans, winged, and orcs can use this class to their advantage, with the most prominent characters being Ravness and Cistina.

This class combines both support and combat elements, as it can heal and buff allies, as well as deal some decent damage. Valkyrie can also cast powerful magic and use summoning spells that become especially useful in the late game.

How to unlock Rune Fencer (Valkyrie)

You can purchase it at the shop for 250 Goth at any time in the game.

A-Tier Classes

White Knight

  • Type: Unique.

Four characters can use this class: Gildas, Mirdyn, Ravness, and Ozma. White Knight is basically an improved Knight class very good in combat and in buffing his allies.

It can be quite formidable when using Paralysis Blade, which has a 100% chance of inflicting stun damage. Velocity Shift can help adjacent allies reduce their recovery times, and that's why it is recommended to use several White Knights in a single self-sustainable party.

How to unlock White Knight

Once you recruit either Gildas or Mirdyn in Chapter 3, the White Knight class will be unlocked automatically.

Knight Commander

  • Type: Unique.

Here is another improved Knight class, which can be used only by one character, which is Ozma. Think of Commander Knight as of slightly less effective Lord in regard to its universal use of both melee and magical damage. 

Its two best skills are Double Attack and Mighty Impact, both of which can deal a significant amount of damage. Although Knight Commander doesn't have access to such a wide variety of weapons as Lord, the choice of Double Daggers is always highly effective.

How to unlock White Knight

Once you recruit Ozma in Chapter 4 Lawful Route, the Knight Commander class will be unlocked automatically.

B-Tier Classes

Ninja (Kunoichi)

  • Type: Generic.

If you want nothing for your class but deep focus on melee damage and mobility, then Ninja is the way to go. This class also does very well with bows and longbows.

Its most powerful skill is Ninjutsu, which includes both ranged damage and debuffing. Ninja's melee attacks combined with double weapons always work like a charm, too.

One of the drawbacks of this class is low defense, which can be improved with the help of Steelstance ability.

How to unlock Ninja (Kunoichi)

Ninja class becomes available for purchase at the shop for 500 Goth once you complete battles in Chapter 3. Note that this class can be used only by humans.

Berserker

  • Type: Generic.

This is an improved Warrior class with an even stronger focus on melee damage.

It has access to a wide array of heavy weaponry, which in combination with the Sanguine Assault skill, can easily deal with several enemies in a single turn. The same goes for bosses, even the ones that create the most problems for many players.

Just like Ninja, this class has low defenses, which can be improved with the help of Dark Armor set.

How to unlock Berserker

Once you complete the battle at Xeod Moors in Chapter 2, this class becomes available at the shop for 250 Goth. It can be used only by humans, lizardmen, and orcs.

Those are the best classes in Tactics Ogre: Reborn. You can also read our official Tactics Ogre: Reborn review right here as well as check out our character recruitment guide.

]]>
Tactics Ogre: Reborn Recruitment Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/egacg/tactics-ogre-reborn-recruitment-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/egacg/tactics-ogre-reborn-recruitment-guide Fri, 25 Nov 2022 11:58:49 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are more than 30 recruitable characters in Tactics Ogre: Reborn through the game's four chapters and post-game CODA episodes. The route you take will determine which characters you can recruit, as different ones are available between the lawful, neutral, and chaotic routes.

Let's go over each of the game's recruitable characters and their requirements.

Chapter 1 Recruitment List

Canopus

  • Class: Vartan.

Once the battle at Tynemouth Hill begins, he will join your team automatically.

Donnalto

  • Class: Cleric.

You need to choose to keep Donnalto alive at the end of the battle at Krysaro if you wish to recruit him.

Felicia

  • Class: Cleric.

If you choose to let Donnalto die, then Felicia will be the alternative choice.

Sara

  • Class: Archer.

Once the battle at Krysaro is over, Sara will join your team automatically.

Voltare

  • Class: Knight.

Once the battle at Krysaro is over, Voltare will join your team automatically.

Chapter 2 Chaotic Recruitment List

Arycelle

  • Class: Archer.

During the battle at Xeod Moors, she will join you as a guest. If you keep her alive through all the battles up to Tynemouth Hill, she will join the party for good.

Bayin

  • Class: Wizard.

You need to choose to keep Bayin alive during the battle at Qadriga Fortress and then accept him as guest.

Folcurt

  • Class: Wizard.

Accept Folcurt as a guest at Krysaro and keep him alive.

Cistina

  • Class: Valkyrie.

You can recruit her at Boed Fortress if your party had Folcurt and Bayin as guests up to that moment.

Xapan

  • Class: Berserker.

You need to be on the Lawful route, then choose to keep Xapan alive during the battle at Qadriga Fortress if you wish to recruit him.

Chapter 3 Lawful Recruitment List

Jeunan

  • Class: Dragoon.

Once the battle in Brigantys is over, select a second choice during a questionnaire to recruit him.

Ravness

  • Class: Valkyrie.

You need to choose to keep Ravness alive during the battle at Balmamusa, then accept her as a guest at the Bahanna Highlands battle.

Vyce

  • Class: Ranger.

Once you recapture the Almorica Castle, Vyce will join your party automatically.

Arycelle

  • Class: Archer.

Once you recapture the Almorica Castle, Arycelle will join your party automatically if you let her live prior to this battle.

Mirdyn

  • Class: White Knight.

Once you recapture the Almorica Castle, Mirdyn will join your party automatically.

Gildas

  • Class: White Knight.

Once you recapture the Almorica Castle, Gildas will join your party automatically.

Hobyrim

  • Class: Swordmaster.

You need to choose to keep Hobyrim alive during the battle against Ozma at the Arkhaiopolis of Rhime.

Chapter 3 Neutral Recruitment List

Phaesta

  • Class: Valkyrie.

You need to choose to keep Phaesta alive during the optional battle at Qadriga Fortress.

Chamos

  • Class: Wizard.

You need to choose to keep Chamos alive during the optional battle at Qadriga Fortress.

Tamuz

  • Class: Knight.

You need to choose to keep Tamuz alive during the optional battle at Qadriga Fortress.

Oelias

  • Class: Cleric.

You need to choose to keep Oelias alive during the battle at Port Asyton.

Dievold

  • Class: Terror Knight.

You need to choose to keep Dievold alive during the battle at Port Asyton.

Chapter 4 Recruitment List

Olivya

  • Class: Cleric.

Once the battles at Brigantys Castle are over, she will join your team automatically.

Cressida

  • Class: Necromancer.

Make sure that you're on Chaos Route and that your Chaos Frame is 50 or higher. Then, follow the story. Once the time comes, you will need to resurrect her.

Sherri

  • Class: Witch.

You need to choose to keep Sherri alive during the battle at Hagia Banhamuba. She will escape first, but then you can recruit her at Balmamusa when it's raining.

Ceria

  • Class: Valkyrie.

You need to be on Neutral Route and join the Pirates of Qadriga Fortress quest. When Ehlrig, the cleric asks you a question, reply: "Will you aid us?", and both Ceria and Ehlrig will join you.

Ozma

  • Class: Knight Commander.

Make sure that you're on Lawful Route and keep Ozma alive after you defeat Volaq and the healers at the optional battle in Krysaro.

Catiua

  • Class: Princess.

You need to choose to keep Catiua alive at Barnicia Castle, and later she will join you at Phidoh Castle.

Azelstan

  • Class: Buccaneer.

Complete both optional battles at Port Omish and another battle at the Pirate's Graveyard, and Azelstan will join you.

Lindl

  • Class: Fusilier.

You need to choose to keep Lindl alive at the battle in Grimsby for him to join you.

Ocionne

  • Class: Beast Tamer.

Make sure that you're on Lawful Route and keep Ocionne alive at the battle in Lhazan Fortress.

Ganpp

  • Class: Beast Tamer.

You need to choose to keep Ganpp alive at the battle in Grimsby for him to join you, including his griffins Obda and Berda.

Rudlum

  • Class: Warlock.

You need to choose to keep Rudlum alive during the battle in the Palace of the Dead.

CODA Recruitment List

Iuria

  • Class: Songstress.

Complete the battle at the Pirate's Graveyard after reading the topic about Iuria in CODA Episode One.

Warren

  • Class: Astromancer.

You need to choose to keep Warren alive during the battle in the Palace of the Dead (Floor 115) in CODA Episode Two.

Lanselot

  • Class: Holy Knight.

You need to choose to keep Lanselot alive during the second battle at Arkhaiopolis of Rhime in CODA Episode Three.

That's everything you need to know on how to recruit characters in Tactics Ogre: Reborn. You can also read our official Tactics Ogre: Reborn review right here.

]]>
Pokémon Scarlet and Violet: What is the Secret Menu Item for the Normal Gym Test https://www.gameskinny.com/qfus7/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-what-is-the-secret-menu-item-for-the-normal-gym-test https://www.gameskinny.com/qfus7/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-what-is-the-secret-menu-item-for-the-normal-gym-test Fri, 25 Nov 2022 11:48:14 -0500 John Schutt

Midway through your adventure in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, you’ll need to take on Larry, the Gym Leader in the city of Medali, northwest of the Great Crater of Paldea. To face him, however, you have to pass his Gym Test, which has you searching for the Secret Menu Item of the Treasure Eatery.

You’ll be tasked with hunting down clues throughout the town to uncover the answer. We’ll cover where you need to go to get the answers as well as the solution itself in this guide.

Normal Gym Test Secret Menu Item

When you arrive in Medali and head into the Gym, you can accept the Gym Test to receive your task: discovering the Secret Menu Item at the Treasure Eatery on the northeast side of town. You’ll be told to ask the patrons of the restaurant what they know about the Item, called “how the regulars season their dishes,”

The Test is more of a treasure hunt than a quiz, and the first place you’ll want to go is Treasure Eatery itself. However, don’t speak to the waiter at the restaurant immediately, as that will start the question-and-answer portion.

Instead, head to the bar at the back of the room and speak to the man in the black suit for your first clue. He’ll tell you, “a nice squeeze of lemon gives any dish a refreshing kick,” with lemon highlighted in red. There’s one part of the answer: lemon.

Leave the Eatery and go back into the city. The remaining clues are out there, and so are three Gym Trainers who give you hints on how to find the clues you want. You’re welcome to fight them for the EXP and PokeDollars, but the other clues you want are perfectly learnable by wandering about.

Where you go next is up to you, but one of the most obvious places to look is the cabbie with the big blue bird on his head. The bird also talks. If you hang around it long enough, it will speak another word highlighted in red: “Meedyum.” There’s your second part of the Menu Item: medium.

For your third clue, you’re looking for an ice cream stand with something out of place on the menu. The stand you want is in the northeast part of town. Go into the vendor’s inventory, and at the bottom, you’ll see an item that is certainly not ice cream: grilled rice balls, another part of the Secret Menu Item.

The third and final clue is at the southwestern part of town. You’ll see a circular set of stairs leading down into a large drain hole in the wall. Defeating the Gym Trainer nearby says you should look for “a dark spot surrounded by stairs,” precisely where you are.

Head down to the grate and interact with it to receive the message “There’s some faint writing here. It says, “Fire Blast.”

That’s your final piece of the Secret Menu Item. Time to head back to Treasure Eatery.

Speak to the waiter, and he’ll ask you four questions. Ultimately, you’ll want to say a medium serving of grilled rice balls, Fire Blast style, with fresh lemon.

Giving this correct answer to the Secret Menu Item triggers a short cutscene where the restaurant dining area transforms into a Gym battle arena. You’ll then receive the Gym Test Passed screen, and you’ll be able to return to the Gym staffer to challenge Larry properly.

And that's what you need to know about the Secret Menu Item for the Gym Test. Pokemon Scarlet and Violet have a lot going on as a different take on the mainline Pokemon experience. Check out our Scarlet and Violet guides on some of the game's more quirky aspects.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: Best Titan Order Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/tbv9d/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-titan-order-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/tbv9d/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-best-titan-order-guide Fri, 25 Nov 2022 11:05:45 -0500 John Schutt

Progression in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet is technically non-linear  as it should be for an open-world game  but there is a critical path. Zones in the game do not level alongside you but have a set difficulty based on when you’re likely to reach them. The same is true for the five Titan Pokemon you’ll need to defeat to unlock either Koraidon or Miraidon’s various abilities.

You can technically do most of the Titan fights in any order, but if you want the most efficient progress, there’s a specific path you’ll need to take. Discover that path in this guide.

The Best Titan Order in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

You start your Pokemon journey in the southern region of Paldea, and you’ll want to begin your quest to take down the Titans quickly.

Titans have no listed levels but are still tuned to an expected level range based on the range you’re likely to encounter. As such, if you fight them later than intended, you’ll probably take them out in one or two moves. You will have to defeat all five to complete the game, so it benefits you to face them in the proper order, which is listed below.

Klawf, the Stony Cliff Titan

Located in a rocky region just east of Mesagoza and the Uva Academy, Klawf is the first Titan you should encounter, as he’s the lowest assumed level of all of them. Wild Pokemon around him are levels 11 through 15, so expect him to be about that level. The difference between Titans and the standard Pokemon they’re based on is their increased attack power and health pools.

You’ll want to be between levels 15 through 18 when you face the Stony Cliff Titan for a fair fight, and be sure to bring Water, Grass, and Ground types, as Klawf is pure Rock. Use special attacks as well, as its Defense is its highest stat, but its Special Defense is in the bin.

For defeating Klawf, the Stony Cliff Titan, your Koraidon or Miraidon receives the ability to dash by pressing down the left stick.

Bombirdier, the Open Sky Titan

While Klawf is the lower-level fight, Bombidier isn’t much higher. He’s located farther to the west of Mesagoza on the western edge of the map, and you’ll want to be between levels 18 through 22 to take him on, depending on your team composition and preparedness.

Have an Electric, Fairy, or Rock type in your team for a much more comfortable fight, as the Open Sky Titan is dual Flying and Dark. He’s immune to Psychic and Ground and resistant to Grass, Ghost, and Dark.

For defeating Bombirdier, your Koraidon or Miraidon received the ability to swim in rivers, lakes, and oceans. You can also dash while swimming in case you need to get to other islands or across the water faster.

Orthworm, the Lurking Steel Titan

It’s possible to head back east, then straight north across the river to fight Orthworm, the Lurking Steel Titan, but expect to have your Pokemon’s faces pushed in if you do. The area north of the river is home to much stronger Pokemon than those on the southern part of the continent.

Orthworm itself is quite the tank, and we recommend being around level 30, give or take a few levels, before you fight him.

It’s a pure Steel type, so Fire, Fighting, and Ground types are preferable, but don’t expect a Poison-type to do anything. Steel types resist almost every other type in the game, save Water, Electric, Ghost, and Dark. As with Klawf, you’ll want to bring Special attackers, as Orthworm has even higher Defenses but even lower Special Defense.

For defeating Orthworm and claiming its Herba Mystica, your Koraidon or Miraidon can jump more than twice as high, which is much more useful than it sounds.

Great Tusk or Iron Treads, the Quaking Earth Titan

The only Titans that vary based on whether you have Scarlet or Violet, facing the Quaking Earth Titan is a much harder fight than any you’ve had to this point. Expect to need an average level of at least 40 or so before you take them on — much higher if you can’t field Pokemon that hit the Titan’s weaknesses.

The Quaking Earth Titan for your version of the game can be found in the south western portion of Asado Desert. Arvan will call to let you know when you're close.

Great Tusk, a variant of Donphan, is a dual Ground/Fighting type, making Psychic, Grass, Water, and Flying the most common types to bring. Electricity, Poison, Rock, Dark, and Bug are out of the question, and as with previous fights, Special attackers are your way to go. Beware of Great Tusk’s massive Attack stat, as it will hit like an absolute truck.

Iron Treads, also a variant of Donphan, is a very different beast. He’s a dual Ground/Steel, is very fast, and has higher Defenses than Great Tusk, befitting its Steel nature. Fire, Water, Fighting, and Ground types are your best options here, with few other options giving you much joy.

For defeating the Quaking Earth Titan, your Koraidon or Miraidon gains the ability to glide through the air for a set distance.

Dondozo and Tatsugiri, the False Dragon Titan

The final Titan you need to face is something of a trick battle, and your team will need to be not much lower than levels 52 through 57 for a fair fight. You’ll find the large Dodonzo on an island near the center of Casseroya Lake.

Dondozo isn’t much of a fighter, but it has one of the largest HP pools in any Pokemon game besides Wailord. It’s also yet another Titan with a sorry Special Defense but high standard Defense, and as a mono-Water type, bring your Electric and Grass types. You’ll need to defeat Dondozo twice, at which point the second phase of the fight begins, this time against Tatsugiri, a much smaller Dragon/Water Pokémon.

Tatsugiri is weak only to other Dragon moves and Fairy attacks, but unlike Dondozo, none of its stats are exceptional, with its Defense being one of its weakest stats. You’ll have Arven with you for the fight to take some of the edge off, and defeating the False Dragon Titan will give your Koraidon or Miraidon the ability to climb cliff faces.

And that's the best titan order for Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Check out our other Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Get the Amulet Coin https://www.gameskinny.com/srirf/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-the-amulet-coin https://www.gameskinny.com/srirf/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-get-the-amulet-coin Fri, 25 Nov 2022 10:53:03 -0500 Hayes Madsen

The Amulet Coin is one of the most sought-after held items in the Pokemon series, and that trend continues with Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. The item doubles the amount of money you net as a reward in trainer battles, provided the Pokemon holding the amulet takes part in them.

The sooner you get your hands on this useful held item, the better. Here's how to get the Amulet Coin in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet.

Amulet Coin Location

To get the Amulet Coin, you'll need to make your way to the Medali (East) Pokemon Center, which is found in the town of Medali in the northwest part of the map.

Talk to the Pokemon League representative at this center, who will reward you with the Amulet Coin. However, the catch is that you first need to beat five trainers in the West Province (Area Three)

Area Three is the general landscape surrounding Medali, and you can see it listed on the map. It's not too hard to find five total trainers, but if you're struggling, simply follow the road that heads northeast out of Medali and toward Glaseado.

You can find four trainers scattered along the path that should let you hit the required amount easily. Keep in mind that if you talk to the Pokemon League Rep, they'll let you know how many trainers you've currently defeated in the area. 

Once you've achieved the task, simply head back and claim your reward, then make sure to go into the menu, select a Pokemon, and then choose "Give an item to hold." 

That's everything you need to know about getting the Amulet Coin in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. If you need any other help or tips, make sure to check out our other guides to the newest Pokemon entries.

]]>
Soulstone Survivors Runes Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/366xf/soulstone-survivors-runes-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/366xf/soulstone-survivors-runes-guide Fri, 25 Nov 2022 10:31:58 -0500 Sergey_3847

Every character build in Soulstone Survivors can be significantly improved by applying runes that possess special powers and synergies. Our guide will provide you with a complete list of all runes in Soulstone Survivors, as well as tips on how to unlock them.

How to Unlock and Equip Runes in Soulstone Survivors

Runes are powerful effects that can be unlocked in the Skill Tree and equipped in the rune slots to increase build synergies.

You need to unlock the ability to equip runes using Minor Soulstones, which can be earned by simply defeating enemies. Once you have 5 Minor Soulstones you can unlock the Runes skill.

After that, you can start unlocking the runes themselves by completing various challenges throughout the game. Each rune has three tiers of skills that can be additionally unlocked with more Soulstones.

All runes have a cost between 1 and 5, and you have the maximum power of 5 to equip runes in the rune slots of your Skill Tree. For example, you can either equip five runes that each cost 1, or you can equip one rune that costs 5. It's up to you!

All Runes and How to Get Them

Uncommon Runes (Cost: 1)

Center of Attention

  • Effect: Focuses all random area effects at your position.
  • Requirement: Unlock at least eight characters.

Dash Mastery

  • Effect: Increases dash speed by 50%.
  • Requirement: Complete Curse 2: Frozen Wasteland.

Weapon Expert

  • Effect: Unlocks a special skill for your selected weapon.
  • Requirement: Reach Level 100 in a single match.

Rare Runes (Cost: 2)

Controlled Chaos

  • Effect: Guarantees top damage for all your sources of random damage.
  • Requirement: Complete at least 70% of Endless Cycle 3.

Critical Mastery

  • Effect: Guarantees 100% critical hit chance each time you deal critical damage.
  • Requirement: Complete Curse 3: Grove.

Executioner

  • Effect: All negative status effects that you afflict on enemies have 5% bonus damage.
  • Requirement: Complete Curse 4: Dungeon Despair.

Focus Fire

  • Effect: Increases all your damage by 40%, but reduces all your area effects by 20%.
  • Requirement: Destroy 2,000 elite enemies.

Generalist

  • Effect: All your active skills have 5% bonus damage.
  • Requirement: Destroy 400 Void Lords.

Multi-cast Mastery

  • Effect: Increases chance of multi-casting.
  • Requirement: Complete Curse 4: Caves.

Purity

  • Effect: Increases all your damage by 50%, but reduces 5% of damage for each negative status effect afflicted on enemies.
  • Requirement: Destroy 200,000 enemies.

Surefooted

  • Effect: All damage received by your character is reduced by 15%. Your resistance to pushbacks is increased.
  • Requirement: Reach Level 90.

Epic Runes (Cost: 3)

Commanding Presence

  • Effect: Reduces all your damage by 40%, but increases all damage of your summons by 40%.
  • Requirement: Destroy 300,000 enemies.

Recklessness

  • Effect: For each point of lost HP your damage is increased by 0.5%.
  • Requirement: Destroy 3,000 elite enemies.

Reroll Mastery

  • Effect: You get one extra reroll after every five levels.
  • Requirement: Destroy 500 Void Lords.

Legendary Runes

Synergetic (Cost: 4)

  • Effect: Increases the chance of synergy power-ups by 20%. when chaining negative status effects afflicted on enemies.
  • Requirement: Complete Endless Cycle 3.

Singular Focus (Cost: 5)

  • Effect: Increases the number of possible active skills, including power-ups.
  • Requirement: Complete Curse 6: Caves.

Those are all runes in Soulstone Survivors and tips on how to get them. For more, check out our guide on the best builds in Soulstone Survivors.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Best Armor Sets https://www.gameskinny.com/2mu59/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-armor-sets https://www.gameskinny.com/2mu59/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-armor-sets Fri, 25 Nov 2022 10:29:43 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are more than 20 different armor sets for Kratos to wear in God of War: Ragnarok. Many are available in the early game, but the best ones become available in the second half of the main campaign.

This guide will provide you with a list of the best armor sets in God of War: Ragnarok, including how to get them all.

Steinbjorn Armor Set

The Steinbjorn armor set consists of the following pieces:

  • Steinbjorn Plackart (Defense: 190).
  • Steinbjorn Gauntlets (Defense: 85; Strength: 34).
  • Steinbjorn Waist Guard (Defense: 119).

If you have a fully upgraded Steinbjorn set, then your defense stat will count more than 400 points in total, and that alone will make you invincible to almost any attacks.

The chest piece of the Steinbjorn armor is universal in regards to the damage it can handle, including both sharp and blunt weapons. But the best part about it is that it will heal you over time once you start losing HP.

The rest of the armor is mainly focused on stagger effects. There is also a slight chance to inflict stun on enemies when you receive damage.

How to Get Steinbjorn Armor Set

The entire set can be crafted with Slumber Stones, and here are some tips on how to get them:

  1. Craft Draupnir Spear.
  2. Obtain the Mystical Heirloom relic from the Myr's Temple in Midgard.
  3. Find Sleeping Troll statues all over the Nine Realms.
  4. Awaken and defeat the Trolls with the equipped spear and relic.
  5. Collect Slumber Stones as rewards.

Once you have at least 4 Slumber Stones, you can craft an entire Steinbjorn armor set at Brok's or Sindri's shop.

Berserker Armor Set

The Berserker armor set consists of the following pieces:

  • Berserker Cuirass (Defense: 27; Strength: 68; Runic: 41; Vitality: 41; Cooldown: 41; Luck: 41).
  • Berserker Gauntlets (Strength: 77; Runic: 21; Vitality: 21; Cooldown: 21; Luck: 21).
  • Berserker Waist Guard (Defense: 41; Runic: 11; Vitality: 11; Cooldown: 11; Luck: 11).

Many consider the Berserker armor superior to the Steinbjorn set, as it provides both powerful defense and boosts the rest of Kratos' stats. If you're more interested in a universal type of armor rather than it being simply impenetrable, as is the case with the Steinbjorn armor, then pick up the Berserker set instead.

One of its biggest upsides is that Berserker armor significantly increases your melee damage. If you deliver successful hits with your weapon, then there is a chance of enabling a Soul Explosion, which can help you overcome the hardest of battles.

How to Get Berserker Armor Set

The entire Berserker set can be obtained during the "Fit for a King" favor, which requires you defeat Berserker souls at a number of Berserker Gravestones for special rewards.

Here are the locations of the Gravestones for each of the pieces of the Berserker armor:

  • Berserker Cuirass: The Barrens, Alfheim.
  • Berserker Gauntlets: Mist Fields, Nilfheim.
  • Berserker Waist Guard: Lake of Nine, Midgard.

Surtr's Scorched Armor Set

The Surtr's Scorched armor set consists of the following pieces:

  • Surtr's Scorched Cuirass (Defense: 68; Strength: 82; Vitality: 48).
  • Surtr's Scorched Arm (Strength: 94; Vitality: 30).
  • Surtr's Scorched Girdle (Defense: 76; Strength: 17; Vitality: 30).

This particular armor set is focused almost entirely on buffing Kratos' strength and vitality. You will survive not because your defenses are strong but because you will defeat your enemies much faster and stay alive much longer.

But there is also a strong defensive element to this armor, which has increased resistance to stagger damage.

How to Get Surtr's Scorched Armor

Once you find the second Muspelheim seed piece, travel to the Muspelheim Crucible, where a number of challenges can be completed for special rewards. You will win the pieces of this armor by completing the following Crucible challenges:

  • Surtr's Scorched Cuirass: Endurance Challenge.
  • Surtr's Scorched Arm: Ring of Fire Challenge.
  • Surtr's Scorched Girdle: Boss Rush Challenge.

Lunda's Lost Armor Set

The Lunda's Lost armor set consists of the following pieces:

  • Lunda's Lost Cuirass (Defense: 54; Strength: 68; Runic: 54).
  • Lunda's Lost Bracers (Strength: 77; Runic: 17; Luck: 34).
  • Lunda's Lost Belt (Defense: 77; Runic: 17; Luck: 34).

Lastly, here is an armor set that gives Kratos the power to poison enemies, which kills them slowly with damage over time, a helpful tool at higher difficulties, especially later in the game.

How to Get Lunda's Lost Armor

Finding all three pieces of this armor will take some time, but you can follow our guide on how to get Lunda's Lost Armor for all the details.

Those are the best armor sets in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
Pokemon Scarlet and Violet: How to Buy and Change Clothes https://www.gameskinny.com/vyiso/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-buy-and-change-clothes https://www.gameskinny.com/vyiso/pokemon-scarlet-and-violet-how-to-buy-and-change-clothes Fri, 25 Nov 2022 10:24:57 -0500 Hayes Madsen

Pokemon Scarlet and Violet bring players yet another monster-catching adventure, this time in the lush Paldea region inspired by Spain. Ever since Pokemon X and Y, the series has put more and more emphasis on character customization, and one of those options is buying and changing clothes.

As you might expect, Scarlet and Violet continue that trend, even though clothing options feel a bit more limited than in the past few entries. If you really want to find your own style, however, you'll need to know how to find stores to purchase new threads. Here's everything you need to know about clothing in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet

How to Get Clothes

Pokemon Scarlet and Violet tell you pretty early on that you can get new clothes, but they don't exactly signpost where you need to go. Follow the tutorial until you reach the city of Mesagoza and the academy.

In the town square, you'll find the game's first clothing stores and a barbershop to change your hairstyle. If you open your map and zoom in, you can see T-shirt icons for clothing and a scissors icon for a barbershop, which is what you'll want to look for in later towns.

Here's a list of the shops that provide customization options in Mesagoza. You won't ever be able to buy new options for your shirt and pants unless Nintendo releases an update in the future. There are currently four options for "uniforms" in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet, and you'll have those unlocked from the beginning. 

  • Bagin's — Bags
  • Zapaldea Footwear — Shoes
  • Sock Quarter — Socks
  • Spec Shack — Glasses 
  • Capbourg — Hats
  • Rough and Tough — Gloves

As you progress through the game, you'll reach two other cities that have clothes shops: Cascarrafa and Levincia. These towns have the same clothing options but also add two new stores: Veracidad (Bags) and Seguro Style (Gloves), which provide even more options. 

Keep in mind that like everything else in the game, you can purchase clothes using either money or League Points. Once you've picked out your threads, you'll need to know how to put them on. 

How to Change Your Outfit

Changing your clothes is incredibly easy and can be done at any time by simply pressing left on the D-pad. This will bring up the clothing menu, where you can choose different options for every category, including uniforms, socks, shoes, gloves, backpack, hats, glasses, and phone cases. 

On this screen, you can also change the (+) button to change your look and re-edit things like eyes, facial features, and more. Make sure to save your changes when you exit the menu. 

That's everything you need to know about buying and changing clothes in Pokemon Scarlet and Violet. Check out our growing list of Pokemon Scarlet and Violet guides here on GameSkinny.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Best Shields Tier List https://www.gameskinny.com/3llku/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-shields-tier-list https://www.gameskinny.com/3llku/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-shields-tier-list Tue, 22 Nov 2022 13:47:47 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are five shields in God of War: Ragnarok that protect Kratos from incoming attacks and allow him to parry. The best ones come only in the latter part of the game, but some good options are available at the start.

This guide will provide you with a tier list of the best shields in God of War: Ragnarok, including tips on how to find and upgrade them.

S-Tier Shield

Onslaught Shield

  • Defense: 85
  • Runic: 17

Besides having the highest defense stat in the game, the Onslaught shield also has the best perk: Shield Rush. If enemies are standing at a distance, this move will allow you to rush to them with a heavy impact.

You can start using the Onslaught shield at Level 6. You can also upgrade it to Level 9 with the following materials:

  • Level 7 (Defense: 100; Runic: 20): 11,000 Hacksilver, 4 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 8 (Defense: 115; Runic: 23): 15,000 Hacksilver, 6 Luminous Alloy, 25 Dust of Realms.
  • Level 9 (Defense: 130; Runic: 26): 20,000 Hacksilver, 50 Dust of Realms, 3 Blazing Embers.

How to get the Onslaught Shield

First, you need to defeat Garm boss, who can be found in the Helheim region during the 12th story mission, "Reunion". You then need to open a legendary chest at the location indicated on the map above, which contains the Onslaught Shield.

A-Tier Shield

Shatter Star Shield

  • Defense: 40
  • Runic: 8

Although Shatter Star isn't as sturdy as the Onslaught shield, its perk Shield Punch is very useful. It allows you to punch enemies, and the longer you charge it, the harder it punches.

You can use it at Level 3, but it is also possible to upgrade it to Level 9, which requires the following materials:

  • Level 4 (Defense: 55; Runic: 11): 3,000 Hacksilver, 3 Honed Metal.
  • Level 5 (Defense: 70; Runic: 14): 5,000 Hacksilver, 6 Honed Metal.
  • Level 6 (Defense: 85; Runic: 17): 7,500 Hacksilver, 2 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 7 (Defense: 100; Runic: 20): 11,000 Hacksilver, 4 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 8 (Defense: 115; Runic: 23): 15,000 Hacksilver, 6 Luminous Alloy, 25 Dust of Realms.
  • Level 9 (Defense: 130; Runic: 26): 20,000 Hacksilver, 50 Dust of Realms, 3 Blazing Embers.

How to get the Shatter Star Shield

You can get the Shatter Star shield during the 6th story mission, "The Reckoning". It can be found inside a legendary chest right in front of the bridge at the Abandoned Village.

B-Tier Shields

Guardian Shield

  • Defense: 10

This is a starting shield of the game, and it's good for what it is, but eventually, it gets broken. Later on, there is an opportunity for you to repair it.

Its perk Shield Check allows you to break the enemy's guard, using a quick combo of blocking and quick attack.

Guardian shield doesn't require any upgrades up until Level 5, where you can start improving it with the help of:

  • Level 5 (Defense: 70): 5,000 Hacksilver, 6 Honed Metal.
  • Level 6 (Defense: 85): 7,500 Hacksilver, 2 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 7 (Defense: 100): 11,000 Hacksilver, 4 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 8 (Defense: 115): 15,000 Hacksilver, 6 Luminous Alloy, 25 Dust of Realms.
  • Level 9 (Defense: 130): 20,000 Hacksilver, 50 Dust of Realms, 3 Blazing Embers.

How to repair the Guardian Shield

You don't need to do anything except follow the main storyline. During the 9th mission, "The Word of Fate", Brok will present Kratos with a newly repaired Guardian shield during a cutscene.

Dauntless Shield / Stone Wall Shield

  • Defense: 10

Both of these shields have exactly the same stats as the Guardian shield, and both can be crafted at the shop at the beginning of the game for free.

The only difference between the two shields is the perks: Dauntless has Shield Bash that produces high Stun damage, while Stone Wall has Shield Slam that absorbs incoming hits and launches them back at the enemies.

How to get the Dauntless Shield / Stone Wall Shield

Both shields are available automatically at the end of the "Surviving Fimbulwinter" quest during a cutscene. You can choose one for free, and the other one can be crafted and upgraded with the following materials:

  • Level 1 (Defense: 10): 750 Hacksilver, 1 Slag Deposit.
  • Level 2 (Defense: 25): 500 Hacksilver, 4 Slag Deposits.
  • Level 3 (Defense: 40; Cooldown: 8): 1000 Hacksilver, 8 Slag Deposits.
  • Level 4 (Defense: 55; Cooldown: 11): 3000 Hacksilver, 3 Honed Metal.
  • Level 5 (Defense: 70; Cooldown: 14): 5000 Hacksilver, 6 Honed Metal.
  • Level 6 (Defense: 85; Cooldown: 17): 7500 Hacksilver, 2 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 7 (Defense: 100; Cooldown: 20): 11000 Hacksilver, 4 Luminous Alloy.
  • Level 8 (Defense: 115; Cooldown: 23): 15000 Hacksilver, 6 Luminous Alloy, 25 Dust of Realms.
  • Level 9 (Defense: 130; Cooldown: 26): 20000 Hacksilver, 50 Dust of Realms, 3 Blazing Embers.

Those are the best shields in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Lunda Armor Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/emqin/god-of-war-ragnarok-lunda-armor-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/emqin/god-of-war-ragnarok-lunda-armor-locations Tue, 22 Nov 2022 13:41:27 -0500 Sergey_3847

Lunda's armor is one of the best armor sets in God of War: Ragnarok. But obtaining this set is not easy and will require players to go through a number of hidden locations in the south of Vanaheim.

Our guide will show you all Lunda armor locations in God of War: Ragnarok that contain broken armor pieces, which need to be repaired by Lunda at her workshop.

The Mysterious Orb Favour

If players want to get Lunda's armor set, they must first speak to Lunda at the shop in Freyr's Camp after completing the sixth story mission "The Reckoning".

Lunda will offer you her armor if you bring back her Mysterious Orb, and the pieces of it are found along the journey.

Once you agree to bring back what she asks for the Mysterious Orb quest will begin.

Unlock the River Delta Hidden Passage

You need to unlock a hidden passage in the River Delta before they can take on this quest.

Travel to the location indicated on the map above in the Freyr's Camp of Vanaheim. Be sure to do this in the day time, as that's the only time when the path can be unlocked.

Take the boat on the river bank and travel to the Noatun's Garden, indicated further below.

Lunda's Belt Location

Once you arrive at the Noatun's Garden, you'll be able to find the first piece of Lunda's Armor: Lunda's Broken Belt.

You will see the Rune Mirror door in the back of the area, between two Troll statues, when you arrive. Interact with the door by using the chisel, and the wall will move away, revealing the chest with the Lunda's Belt inside.

Head back into the boat and continue rowing southward to the next location.

Lunda's Bracers Location

Soon you should arrive at the Cliffside Ruins, which is another hidden location in Vanaheim.

Once you're there, approach the left portion of the ruins an climb the wall. When you're on top, follow the path, and you should see the open room to the right with a hanging body off the ceiling.

Destroy the noxious plants inside the room, and approach a red chest containing Lunda's Broken Bracers.

Unlock The Veiled Passage

You need to unlock the next area from the Cliffside Ruins if you want to find the last piece of Lunda's armor.

From the room with the Broken Bracers, exit and turn right; you will see several platforms in front of you and to the right. Jump onto the closest one, and move left to the southernmost platform, which is indicated by the marker on the map above.

Once you're there, you will see a chain in the thorns on the side of the cliff. Use the Blades of Chaos to destroy the thorns and release the chain.

Go back to the ground level, and interact with the chain you just released. Use it to climb the cliff, and follow the path left until you reach a rune on the edge of the cliff. Interact with the rune and watch a massive rock in the distance drop to the ground, revealing The Veiled Passage area.

Lunda's Cuirass and Mysterious Orb

Go back to the boat, and row east, then south, taking the waterway all the way down to the Veiled Passage location indicated by the marker on the map. About halfway down, you will see an opening to your left, with the Goddess Falls in front of you. Take that path to go into a cave that is the Passage itself.

Inside the cave, you will see a beach on the right. Dock there. Look to your left, and you should notice an object on the ground next to a grindstone. Pick up the Mysterious Orb.

Get back into the boat, and travel to the end of the waterway in the cave, where dead bodies hang off the ceiling. You should see a chest glowing in the distance to your left. Inside the chest you will find the last piece of Lunda's armor: Lunda's Broken Cuirass.

Once all four pieces are collected, including the Mysterious Orb, go back to the forge across from the Cliffside Ruins and give Lunda all the broken pieces of armor and an orb. She will repair the broken armor and give you the armor set as a reward for completing the quest.

That's everything you need to know on how to get Lunda's armor in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok guides hub right here.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Frozen Flame Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/4dkt2/god-of-war-ragnarok-frozen-flame-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/4dkt2/god-of-war-ragnarok-frozen-flame-locations Fri, 18 Nov 2022 15:29:57 -0500 Sergey_3847

Upgrading the Leviathan Axe in God of War: Ragnarok is key to taking on the progressively more difficult enemies the game throws at you. Even with the best armor in the game, having a leveled primary weapon becomes a requirement. To do so, you will need Frozen Flames, eight of which are scattered throughout the game.

This guide will provide you with all Frozen Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok, including their exact spots on the map.

Frozen Flame Location #1

The very first Frozen Flame can be obtained in the Lower Wildwoods of Midgard, when you fight The Huntress mini-boss during the game's opening hours.

This battle can't be missed; it is a part of the prologue, "Surviving Fimbulwinter." Once the boss is defeated, she will drop your first Frozen Flame.

Frozen Flame Location #2

The next Frozen Flame can be obtained during Chapter 4, "Groa's Secret." Here, you will travel to The Strond in Alfheim and defeat Alva, an Elven mini-boss. Once the battle is over, you will be rewarded with your second Frozen Flame.

Frozen Flame Location #3

For the game's third Frozen Flame, you will need to travel to The Northern Wilds in Vanaheim. This will happen during Ragnarok's sixth story mission, "The Reckoning." Here, you must face Nidhogg as a boss. Defeat them, and the upgrade item is yours. 

Frozen Flame Location #4

It will take some time to get the fourth Frozen Flame in God of  War: Ragnarok; you will need to reach the 12th story mission, "Reunion." Unlike many of the other Flame items (including Chaos Flames), this specific instance will automatically appear in your inventory during the chapter.

Frozen Flame Location #5

As with this region's Chaos Flame, you must face a story boss to get this Frozen Flame. This time around, it is the Flame Phantom. You will come to The Burning Cliffs area of Muspelheim during Chapter 16, "The Summoning."

Frozen Flame Location #6

Travel to The Crater in Vanaheim for the next Frozen Flame, and head to the Plains area, which becomes available during the Scent of Survival Favor. Here you must ride the paper boat to The Crater and chase after Helka.

Once you've reached the spot with the marker, you must defeat the Crimson, the Dread Dragon.

Frozen Flame Location #7

This Frozen Flame can be found in The Barrens of Alfheim, where you'll need to fight three Berserker enemies. This area becomes available after you complete the Secrets of the Sands Favor, but the Berserkers won't be available until later in the story. Return here later. 

Once you reach the spot on the map, the fight will begin. Note that Berserkers will shoot a large number of arrows, so be very careful during this fight. Once it is over, you will be rewarded with the seventh Frozen Flame.

Frozen Flame Location #8

You will need to find all six Hel Tears for the final Frozen Flame. Each Hel Tear will reward players with a Frozen Spark. Once you have all six Frozen Sparks, you will get the Frozen Flame for the Leviathan Axe's final upgrade. Note: you won't be able to open Hel Tears immediately, so come for these after the story.

Hel Tear Location #1

This Hel Tear is part of the critical path and can't be missed. You'll encounter it during The Reunion story quest.

Hel Tear Location #2

You can get the next Hel Tear from the portal appearing between Helgrind and The Gleaming in Helheim.

Hel Tear Location #3

This Hel Tear is near the beginning of the Aurvangar Wetlands area, where you froze the geysers to make a path through the area earlier in the game. 

Hel Tear Location #4

The next portal can be found in The Strond in Alfheim.

Hel Tear Location #5

If you go to the Veiled Passage in Vanaheim, you can see the fifth portal.

Hel Tear Location #6

The final portal with Hel Tear can be found on top of a cliff at the Lake of Nine in Midgard.

Those are all Frozen Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For other locations guides, walkthroughs, and more, head over to our Ragnarok tips hub right here.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Chaos Flame Locations https://www.gameskinny.com/60a8a/god-of-war-ragnarok-chaos-flame-locations https://www.gameskinny.com/60a8a/god-of-war-ragnarok-chaos-flame-locations Fri, 18 Nov 2022 15:07:53 -0500 Sergey_3847

There is only one way to upgrade the Blades of Chaos in God of War: Ragnarok, and that is to find all eight Chaos Flames, special materials scattered throughout the story and a few optional sidequests post-game. Finding them all will allow you to increase the Blades' power to Level 9, inflicting massive amounts of Runic burn and opening up new abilities in the weapon's skill tree. 

This guide will show you all Chaos Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok, including their exact spots on the map.

Chaos Flame Location #1

The very first Chaos Flame can be obtained during the second story mission, "The Quest for Tyr." This mission takes you to The Forge in Svartalfheim. Early in the area, you will fight a Dreki mini-boss; it's part of the critical path and impossible to miss. Defeat to snag your first Blades of Chaos upgrade material.

Chaos Flame Location #2

You won't get your next Chaos Flame until Chapter 6: The Reckoning. Here, you will travel to Freyr's Camp in Vanaheim. Start your journey with Freya, and travel northeast. You will come to an area with a Forest Ancient mini-boss. Once again, defeat the mini-boss for the upgrade material.

Chaos Flame Location #3

The next Chaos Flame will require you to enter the Well of Urd, which is found in a secret passage in the north/northwestern portion of Midgard, at the end of the valley leading northwest from the Lake of Nine.

You will come here during the ninth story mission, "The Word of Fate," where you must face the Frost Phantom mini-boss, which drops the third Chaos Flame after being defeated.

Chaos Flame Location #4

During Chapter 13, "Creatures of Prophecy," you will return to Freyr's Camp in Vanaheim. You will have to fight a Dreki across the river from where you fought the Forest Ancient, but this time on the other bank of the river. If you manage to defeat this mini-boss a second time, it will drop the fourth Chaos Flame.

Chaos Flame Location #5

You will reach Sutr's Forge in Muspelheim during Chapter 16, "The Summoning." Here, you will fight two Soul Eater bosses. Your reward is another Chaos Flame. 

 

Chaos Flame Location #6

This upgrade takes some time to retrieve. First, you must find the two Muspelheim Seed halves, then complete The Crucible Favor. Once complete, you will need to unlock a chest at the spot indicated on the map above and collect the sixth Chaos Flame.

Chaos Flame Location #7

You will gain access to The Sinkholes area of Vanaheim after completing the Scent of Survival Favor, which requires Kratos to chase Helka and ride the paper boat into the crater. Once inside The Sinkholes, you will find the tomb of the Berserker. Defeat the Berserker for the next Chaos Flame.

Chaos Flame Location #8

The eighth and final Chaos Flame can't be found in a single location like the others. Instead, you must hunt down all six Chaos Sparks from the six Draugr Holes throughout the game.

Once all six holes are found and all Hatefuls are defeated, the rewarded Chaos Sparks will be combined into a single Chaos Flame, which will allow you to upgrade Blades of Chaos to their Level 9 maximum.

Draugr Hole Location #1

The first Draugr Hole can be found at the Watchtower in the Bay of Bounty, Svartalfheim.

Draugr Hole Location #2

The second Draugr Hole can be reached on the east of the Applecore, also in Svartalfheim.

Draugr Hole Location #3

Travel to The Barrens in Alfheim, and you will find another Draugr hole on top of a small cliff on the western side of the area.

Draugr Hole Location #4

The next location can be found at the Lake of Nine in Midgard, close to the King's Grave.

Draugr Hole Location #5

From there, visit the Abandoned Village in Vanaheim.

Draugr Hole Location #6

Finally, find another Draugr Hole at The Crater, which is located in the northern portion of Vanaheim.

Those are all Chaos Flame locations in God of War: Ragnarok. For more tips, tricks, and walkthroughs, head over to our Ragnarok guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — How to Get Muspelheim Seeds https://www.gameskinny.com/2p1r7/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-get-muspelheim-seeds https://www.gameskinny.com/2p1r7/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-get-muspelheim-seeds Thu, 17 Nov 2022 11:14:51 -0500 John Schutt

The realm of Muspelheim was a source of some of the best gear in the 2018 reboot of God of War, and the same is true in God of War: Ragnarok. Getting to it this time is a bit more complicated, as you need two Muspelheim Yggdrasil Seeds to unlock access to the volcanic firepit. You go there as part of the main campaign, but the seeds provide access to the area's challenges and, therefore, the powerful gear on offer.

You won’t need much to get the first Muspelheim Seed, but the second seed piece is locked behind almost a dozen hours of campaign progress. Neither is hard to reach, as both are in Svartalfheim. You just need a specific item to reach one of them and the gear to get past the few enemies guarding it. 

First Muspelheim Seed Location

Soon after getting access to a boat and the Bay of Bounty, you’ll want to head to the western side of the Bay, where you’ll find Modvitnir’s Rig. 

The area is part of the "In Service to Asgard" Favor, but you’ll get the Seed much earlier than the quest objective. From the beach, climb up the first platform, and follow the path around to the right. 

Jump across the gap and climb up to the platform with the Legendary Chest. The Chest has the first Muspelheim Seed within it.

Second Muspelheim Seed Location

You won’t be able to get the second Muspelheim Seed until you have Draupnir’s Spear, which you don’t get until the end of Chapter 6, Forging Destiny. With the Spear in hand, return to Svartalfheim and go to the northern section of the Bay, then head to its eastern edge. There you’ll find Dragon Beach. 

On the northern edge of the Beach is a chain leading to a higher platform with a Spear slot at its back. 

Slot in the Spear, climb up, and follow the path toward the giant statue. Clear whatever monsters are in your way, and you’ll eventually come across another Legendary Chest.

Open it for the second Muspelheim Seed.

With both Seeds in hand, return to any Mystic Gateway, select Muspelheim, and unlock The Crucible. You’ll now be able to take on the Crucible Challenges and complete the Favor of the same name. Be prepared for tricky combat trials that take skill, timing, and sometimes a little luck. For more on God of War Ragnarok, including how to get hacksilver, the best early game armor, or a series of articles doing a zone-by-zone rundown of all the game’s collectibles, check out our guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — How to Beat the Fierce Stalker https://www.gameskinny.com/66k1a/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-beat-the-fierce-stalker https://www.gameskinny.com/66k1a/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-beat-the-fierce-stalker Thu, 17 Nov 2022 11:02:53 -0500 John Schutt

An optional mini-boss in God of War: Ragnarok guarding a Hel Tear, the Fierce Stalker is a difficult challenge worth defeating. You'll encounter her in a side arena on your way to get the Draupnir Spear, and she attacks the instant you open the Tear.

She's also accompanied by two four-legged mobs, which you should focus on first. The Fierce Stalker doesn't have the largest move pool, but the attacks she has hit hard and come in pairs. This guide covers everything you need to know about beating her.

Tips for Beating the Fierce Stalker

The Fierce Stalker will attack the instant you open the realm tear, so be ready to either parry or dodge shortly after the opening animation finishes. Once the fight starts, you'll need to deal with the Stalker and her two beast friends. Take out the mobs, then focus on the centaur.

Fierce Stalker Attacks

You'll only need to worry about four attacks when fighting the Fierce Stalker, but she tends to use them in combo strings, and most of them will break your guard, at least.

Charging Stab

The Fierce Stalker flourishes her spear, lowers it to her side, and charges forward. There's a long yellow-circle parry window, so if you want to counter the attack, the timing is generous. Should you miss the parry, there's little fear of reprisal as the Stalker will end up several meters behind you. The same is true if you dodge the attack to the side.

Three Swing Combo

This attack sees the boss get in your face, pull her spear out to her side, and then swing it horizontally across her front three times. All three swings are slow, and they're not guard crushes or unblockable, so you can parry any of them. Dodging is a bit trickier, as you need to get behind the swings, which you can do by moving behind the side her spear just attacked from.

Unblockable Slash

One of two unblockable attacks of the Fierce Stalker, this one has her twirl her weapon on her left side (your right), swiping it across her body, then stepping forward as she slashes across your midsection. You'll need to dodge roll through the attack to avoid it, as it will catch you if you go backward. A regular attack follows the unblockable swing, so if you manage to get back up after the red circle fades, you can parry again.

Rearing Kick

The boss rears up in your face and attempts to bring her front hooves down on top of you. As the yellow circle forms, she rears for about a second. The actual parry window activates as her hooves are about to hit you. You can also easily dodge to either side to avoid the attack if you aren't comfortable parrying.

Be sure to use Brok whenever you can, as both his Runic Summon and standard attacks deal more damage than you'd expect. Use your Runic Attacks whenever they're off cooldown, and pop your Spartan Rage as an "oh crap" button. You'll be able to loot the Hel Tear once the Stalker dies.

There are many tough enemies in God of War: Ragnarok, and the Fierce Stalker is one of the lesser ones. You should have everything you need to take her down, and if you need even more content, check out our guides hub.

]]>
Sonic Frontiers: How to Complete the Four Towers on Ares Island https://www.gameskinny.com/sqwqe/sonic-frontiers-how-to-complete-the-four-towers-on-ares-island https://www.gameskinny.com/sqwqe/sonic-frontiers-how-to-complete-the-four-towers-on-ares-island Thu, 17 Nov 2022 08:52:22 -0500 Hayes Madsen

Sonic Frontiers puts a new spin on the legendary series, giving players a set of massive islands to roam around and explore at their leisure. It's the closest the Sonic series has ever been to an open-world design, but there's still a main narrative and set of missions linking all of the exploration together.

As Sonic explores each island, he'll occasionally need to complete a little minigame or quest given by one of his friends. The trickiest of these is the "Best Defense" quest found on Ares Island, but we're here to help walk you through the trick.

The Four Towers Best Defense Trick

Up until this point, every tower you've faced has to be defeated by knocking out its pieces until you can attack the head. That might seem like what you need to do for the Four Towers at first, but you'll never complete the quest in time that way. 

These towers attack a little differently; when you get close, they'll jump into the air and slam down, setting off a shockwave of spikes. What you need to do is jump over the spikes, then wall run up the side of the tower while the spikes sit at the bottom. You'll usually have about 10-20 seconds to do this. 

Once you're at the top, simply jump and perform a stomp attack, and you'll instantly take out the tower in one hit. All you need to do is repeat the process three more times, and you should complete the quest with plenty of time to spare. With the Four Towers down, you should have everything you need to continue in your exploration of Ares Island. For even more tips and help, make sure to check out our Sonic Frontiers guide hub

]]>
Star Ocean: The Divine Force — How to Build Chain Combos https://www.gameskinny.com/2q0yg/star-ocean-the-divine-force-how-to-build-chain-combos https://www.gameskinny.com/2q0yg/star-ocean-the-divine-force-how-to-build-chain-combos Wed, 16 Nov 2022 09:07:18 -0500 Will Borger

One of the best parts of Star Ocean: The Divine Force is the game's unique combo and combat system. You're able to build your own combos that you can use in combat, but it'll take a little work. In this guide, we'll walk you through the process of how to build chain combos.

Grab Some Combat Skills

Every character starts out with a few combat abilities, but you'll want to buy some more before you really dig into combo creation. If you want some help with that, you should check out our guide to spending your Skill Points.

Once you have some combat skills to play with, you'll want to go into the menus. Once you've selected the character you want to build combos for, select "Chain Combos" from the submenu.

How to Build Chain Combos

Once you're ion the menu, you'll see the combos you've already built. Each combo sequence is attached to a button, giving you three Chain Combos in total. Pressing the same buttons multiple times will perform the combo you've set up, but you can switch to another chain mid-combo by pressing another button. You can also assign one combat skill to a held button press, which grants you three skills in total.

Making combos is easy. Once you've selected the part of the combo you want to build, simply assign the skill you want. From there, assign the next skill, and so on, until your combo is completed.

How to Make the Best Combos

There are a few things to keep in mind while building combos. First, certain moves are best at being starters and enders, so you'll want to put those moves in those slots.

Combat skills that make for good starters are usually marked as such, while enders generally have lots of startup or recovery, so you'll want to use them to either end strings to reduce the risk of being hit before or after your skill comes out. The description of each move will usually tell you about these properties, so be sure to read them before you assign a skill to a slot.

The other thing you'll want to take into account is a skill's AP cost. AP determines what skills you can perform, so it pays to make sure you're maximizing your AP use. Characters start combat with five AP, unless they land a blindside attack in combat. Once a blindside has been landed, characters can have up to fifteen AP at a time. For tips on landing blindside attacks, check out our guide.

As such, it's best to have combos that cost five AP or less, which you'll be able to use all the time, and other combos that cost more, so you can do more damage once you land a blindside attack. Each combat skill will tell you how much AP it requires, so be sure to check if you're ever unsure. If you have skills that are useful, but don't work super well in a combo, consider assigning them to a held button. That way, you can use them regularly without taking up a combo slot.

Creating chain combos is pretty easy, but maximizing their potential will take time and practice. If you keep these tips in mind, you'll be creating exciting and useful combos in no time. Be sure to check out our other Star Ocean: The Divine Force guides for more tips.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Cliffside Ruins Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/h9gj8/god-of-war-ragnarok-cliffside-ruins-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/h9gj8/god-of-war-ragnarok-cliffside-ruins-collectibles-guide Wed, 16 Nov 2022 02:15:35 -0500 Jonathan Moore

When it comes to collectibles, Cliffside Ruins is perhaps the most confounding location in all of God of War: Ragnarok. To get everything here, you'll need to leave the area completely, venture (very) briefly through another, and completely explore a third. Luckily, this sub-region, Goddess Falls, and The Veiled Passage are all close to one another. If you're here wondering how to get the Cliffside Ruins chest, which is a bit pesky, we've got you covered below.

Once all is said and done, here are the collectibles you can expect to find in Cliffside Ruins:

  • x1 Nornir Chest
  • x1 Favor (Conscience for the Dead)
  • x1 Lore Marker
  • x1 Legendary Chest
  • x1 Lunda's Broken Bracers

Vanaheim: Cliffside Ruins Collectibles Locations

Nornir Chest

  • Reward: Horn of Blood Mead Rage Increase.

Land on the beach across from Brok, and exit the canoe. Defeat the enemies, and go to the back (southwest) portion of the area. The Nornir Chest will be beneath two ruined columns in the cliffs. 

  • Rune Turnstile 1: The first Rune Turnstile is to the right of the Nornir Chest, on the other side of the thick cliff wall. It's covered in vines, and placing Fraya's Sigil Arrows can be a pain, but it can be done with three. Try to position one at the base of the vines, then one in the middle of the rock directly underneath, then the last arrow near the base of the rock directly underneath that. Once you've cleared the vines, hit the Turnstile on the right once. 

  • Rune Turnstile 2: The second Rune Turnstile is hidden in the rocks behind the rocks to the left of the Chest. Look up, and you'll see vines covering a chain near the spirit that gives you the Favor (detailed below). Climb up the wall to the left of the spirit, then go left and jump to the platform. Jump another gap, then go left to jump a third. Go ahead and knock the chain down, then look down into the rocks. Hit the Turnstile on the right once. (Also, go ahead and grab Lunda's Broken Bracers while you're up here; more below). 

  • Rune Turnstile 3: Get in the canoe, and go to the beach with Brok and Lunda. Turn around and face the Cliffside Ruins, and you'll see the final Turnstile on the right amongst some rocks. Hit it once on the right. 

Favor (Conscience for the Dead)

  • Reward: Svartalfheim’s Honor Amulet Enhancement.

Speak to the spirit along the painted cliffs in the southeastern portion of the area, to the left of the Nornir Chest. You'll need to defeat enemies in The Veiled Passage to complete this Favor.

Lunda’s Broken Bracers

Climb the wall to the left of the spirit that gives you the Favor, and follow the path left a short distance. Go into the opening in the wall on the left when the path turns right, and open the red loot chest for Lunda's Broken Bracers.

Lore Marker (Call to Arms)

From the red loot chest, drop back down, then climb the chain you knocked down after interacting with the Nornir Chest Turnstile. Go left at the top, then interact with the Blue Rune plate at the end of the path; Freya will open a new waterway on the river.

Get back in the canoe, and go south (double back from the beach along the right side) to find it. When you enter Goddess Falls, and the text appears on-screen, turn left immediately to go through a passage that leads back under the rocks (you’ll see ruins and columns in the painted rock on the right side as you go into the cave). This is The Veiled Passage, and we have a full walkthrough collectibles guide for this region, as well. Read that as you go.

Go past the first beach for the area’s Nornir Chest, and get out of the boat at the second beach further in. Break through the palisade wall on the left side, destroy the poisonous plants, and climb the wall up. Follow the path all the way around until you climb down a chain. Turn left at the bottom for the Lore Marker.

Legendary Chest

  • Reward: Mists of Helheim Heavy Runic Attack

From the Lore Marker, turn around, and go back to the chain. To the right and down, you’ll find the Legendary Chest, but you’ll need to remove the gold barrier blocking the ledge to get to it. Lower the bridge, and defeat the enemies, then go to the other side and right toward the zip line leading down to Brok and Lunda at the beach.

Don’t use the zip line; instead, turn right to face the Chest. Place one Sigil arrow each on the red markings on the rocks. Then go back to the ledge overlooking the Chest and use the Blades of Chaos to ignite the Sigil arrows to blast away the barrier. Jump down and open the chest.

And with that, you finally have all of the collectibles in Vanaheim's Cliffside Ruins — even the pesky Legendary Chest. We have plenty of more God of War: Ragnarok walkthroughs over on our tips and tricks page for the game.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — The Veiled Passage Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/srvw0/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-veiled-passage-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/srvw0/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-veiled-passage-collectibles-guide Wed, 16 Nov 2022 02:02:56 -0500 Jonathan Moore

The Veiled Passage is one of several hidden areas in God of War: Ragnarok. It's possible you'll come here naturally while exploring Vanaheim, but more likely as part of The Mysterious Orb Favor from Lunda, though you'll pass it during Freya's Missing Peace. While the main draw is Lunda's Orb and a piece of her armor set, there are some collectibles to get your hands on. 

Here's what you can expect to find: 

  • x1 Nornir Chest
  • x1 Lore Marker
  • x1 Odin's Raven
  • x1 Artifact
  • x1 Lunda's Broken Bracers

Vanaheim: The Veiled Passage Collectibles Locations

Nornir Chest

  • Reward: Idunn Apple Health Increase.

When you enter the area, you’ll notice the Nornir Chest on the right side of the cave. Dock the canoe, and grab the firebomb in the back of the area to break the gold barriers. Go up to the Nornir Chest, and you’ll see the three bells you need to ring on the opposite wall across the water.

The left-most bell is in a cage, the middle bell is free, and the right-most bell is in a cage behind vines. You can get away with using three Sigil arrows if lined up as in the screenshot above, though it's easier with four,which you get by fully upgrading Freya's Archery skill tree.

Lunda’s Broken Cuirass

Leave the Nornir Chest and continue through the cave to the next beach. Dock the canoe, and interact with the red loot chest in front of you, to the left of the poisonous cloud.

Lore Marker (Seidr Sacrifice)

From there, go through the hole in the nearby wall, kill the poisonous plants, and climb the wall inside. Turn right at the top for the Lore Marker.

Odin’s Raven

Continue along the path from the Lore Marker a short way, and turn left when the path veers to the right to lead outside. Look up to see the Raven perched on a branch overhanging the water, behind two hanging skeletons.

Artifact (Family Crests: Kvasri’s Crest)

Turn around, and follow the path outside. Fight the enemies, and turn right to enter a tunnel. When it opens up again on the left side, showing the outside, destroy the wooden barricade under the plant shooting barbs at you.

Those are all of the collectibles to be found in Vanaheim's The Veiled Passage. It's one of the easier-to-miss areas in God of War: Ragnarok but contains a piece of the game's (arguably) best armor sets, so it's well worth seeking out. For more on Kratos and Atreus' battle against the end of the world, head over to our Ragnarok guides page

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Noatun's Garden Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/h1daa/god-of-war-ragnarok-noatuns-garden-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/h1daa/god-of-war-ragnarok-noatuns-garden-collectibles-guide Wed, 16 Nov 2022 00:30:05 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Much like Pilgrim's Landing, Noatun's Garden is another relatively small sub-region of Vanaheim found within the River Delta. You'll likely pass by this God of War: Ragnarok location while paddling around the waterways during the Freya's Missing Peace Favor or while looking for Lunda's armor pieces. 

Here are the collectibles you can expect to find:

  • x1 Favor (Garden for the Dead)
  • x1 Artifact
  • x1 Treasure Map
  • x1 Legendary Chest
  • x2 Lore Markers
  • x1 Lunda's Broken Belt

Vanaheim: Noatun's Garden Collectibles Locations

Favor (Garden for the Dead)

  • Reward: Svartalfheim’s Safety Amulet Enchantment

Interact with the spirit on the backside of the tree in the center of the area. You'll be tasked with ridding the Garden of the three poison-spewing braziers around the area.

Lunda's Broken Belt

From the spirit that gave you the Favor, turn around and use your chisel to break the mirrored door between the two Forest Ancient statues. Open the chest inside for Lunda's Broken Belt, a piece of Lunda's missing armor, which you need to complete the Lost Armor Labor. 

Lore Marker (Golrab of the Ashes and Frost)

This Lore Marker is to the right of the mirrored door at the base of the tower with the poison brazier. 

Artifact (Family Crest: Hoenir’s Crest)

This collectible is on the ground in the back right/southeastern corner of the area, right of the Lore Marker tower, near where you can climb on top of the gated building on the southern side of the Garden.

Lore Marker (Garden’s Progress)

From the Artifact, climb on top of the building with the large gate on the southern side of the area. The Lore Marker is on the roof.

Treasure Map (Under the Rainbow)

This Treasure Map is hidden in the rocks to the right of the building with the Legendary Chest on the northern side of the Garden.

Legendary Chest (Jewel of Yggdrasil)

This Chest is locked behind the gated building on the northern side of the Garden, next to the Treasure Map. To gain entry, use the opening on the northeast side to align Sigil arrows to destroy the red flowers wrapped around the counterweight chain. Once you’ve removed them, break the chain of the counterweight to lower it and open the door.

And there you have it: all of the collectibles, Favors, and missing armor pieces in Vanaheim's Noatun's Garden. For more tips and walkthroughs, head over to our God of War: Ragnarok guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Pilgrim's Landing Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/89zc4/god-of-war-ragnarok-pilgrims-landing-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/89zc4/god-of-war-ragnarok-pilgrims-landing-collectibles-guide Tue, 15 Nov 2022 23:50:54 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Pilgrim's Landing is one of the smallest sub-regions in God of War: Ragnarok. Located in Vanaheim, it's composed of a small beach and a stone fortress in the middle of the River Delta area, and you'll likely come here during the Freya's Missing Peace Favor after visiting Freyr's Camp. There are four collectibles in this location.

Here's are the collectibles you can expect to find: 

  • x1 Berserker Gravestone
  • x1 Favor (Cure for the Dead)
  • x1 Lore Marker
  • x1 Legendary Chest

Vanaheim: Pilgrim's Landing Collectibles Locations

Berserker Gravestone

This Berserker Gravestone is unmissable in the middle of the beach, but you'll have to come back for it later if this is your first time here.

Favor: Cure for the Dead

  • Reward: Svartalfheim's Fortune Amulet Enchantment

Speak to the spirit by the cliffs behind the Gravestone. You'll need to enter the stone building in the water to get what she needs. Track the Favor, and the locations will be marked on your map.

Lore Marker (Dead on Arrival)

Use the stone ledge on the eastern side of the beach (overlooking the stone building in the water), and knock down the bridge. Cross over, and turn left. Defeat the enemies, and interact with the Lore Marker on the left side of the area before the second bridge.

Legendary Chest

  • Reward: Grip of the Fallen Alchemist

Grab the Lore Marker, and knock down the second bridge. The Legendary Chest will be directly in front of you. You can also get the River Delta Odin's Raven by looking through the opening to the left of the Chest.

Quick and easy, those are all the collectibles and Favors at Pilgrim's PAssage in Vanaheim. There's a lot more to cover in God of War: Ragnarok, and you can find more tips, walkthroughs, and locations guides right over here

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok Crafting Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/v7cll/god-of-war-ragnarok-crafting-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/v7cll/god-of-war-ragnarok-crafting-guide Tue, 15 Nov 2022 13:12:08 -0500 John Schutt

Crafting is essential to any playthrough of God of War: Ragnarok; no one wants to go through the game with base-level gear. You unlock the ability to craft early in the game, and you'll spend a lot of time in the menu creating equipment for Kratos and Atreus.

This guide will cover all the aspects of crafting you'll need to know, from where it happens, what you can make, and how to get the best items in the game.

How to Unlock Crafting

After completing the introductory mission and gaining access to Sindri's House, you'll be able to go to the workshop to the left of the door and have Brok and Sindri make some early gear. You'll also find at least one of them near many of the Mystic Gateways scattered across the Nine Realms, allowing you to continue crafting between bouts of questing and exploration. Just look for their tent and/or listen for the cling of their hammers.

What Can I Craft in God of War: Ragnarok?

Within the crafting menu itself, you'll be able to create and upgrade weapons, armor, shields, and weapon accessories for Kratos' various gear types, and the list will expand as you play the game. Initially, you can craft the following:

The Leviathan Ax and Knob Upgrades

The Leviathan Ax improves using the rare Frozen Flame material. You'll get many of these as rewards during the campaign, with the final few being awarded for completing difficult side objectives and exploration tasks. The Knobs sit at the end of the Ax's handle and have various build-enhancing effects.

The Blades of Chaos and Handle Upgrades

The Blades improve using the also rare Chaos Flame material, which, like Frozen Flames, you get a few of during the campaign. The remainder are hidden behind exploration, side content, and optional and endgame bosses. Handles upgrade using the standard paths and also provide various build-enhancing abilities.

Shields

There are more than half a dozen shield options in God of War: Ragnarok, and almost all of them have a special alternate ability. You can block with all of them, of course, but some are better defensive options, and others are more suited to taking the fight to your enemies. Others are better at parrying. They upgrade along a similar path to weapons but have materials unique to them.

Chest Armor

The core of almost any build, there are dozens of Chest Armors of varying abilities in God of War: Ragnarok. These are upgraded by using more and more Hacksilver and progressively rarer materials, with levels 7, 8, and 9 costing 20,000, 25,000, and 35,000 Hacksilver, not counting the hard-to-come-by mats you'll need to farm. If you're looking for the best early-game armors to get you started, focus on these two.

Wrist and Waist Armor 

Both wrist and waist armor are supplementary to a build, granting different bonuses and passive abilities than chest armor. In most parts of the main story, you'll want a complete three-piece set of any one kind of armor, but you can do a little mixing and matching come endgame.

You'll earn several new pieces of gear unique to God of War: Ragnarok throughout the story, and these will have their specific upgrade paths, though they follow the systems laid down by what's above. There are also more than a dozen individual crafting materials, which we'll cover in another guide.

Crafting Tips and Tricks

Beyond the core mechanics of the crafting system, there are a few things you can do to make your life a little easier while thumbing through the menus.

Tip 1: Buy crafting materials in bulk when needed

Brok and Sindri's shop has a growing list of basic and uncommon crafting materials you can buy for a small fee. Initially, these will only be the easiest to come by, but by endgame, you'll have access to six mat types. Though they won't let you craft everything, they can cut down on the grind somewhat.

Tip 2: Sell what you don't need

Crafting gets insanely expensive, especially the higher level your gear becomes. Selling the lower-level gear you accumulate can ease some of the cost burden. Don't worry if you sell something you don't mean to: it will stay in the shop inventory labeled as Buy Back, and you'll pay what you sold it for.

Tip 3: Gather from glowing golden water, crash into crates

In the waterways of the Nine Realms, you'll sometimes come across gold-flecked water. Gathering from these points always yields a few crafting materials; the later in the game you are, the better they'll be. The same is true in Midgard's Lake of Nine. Being frozen over, there are no golden pools of water. Instead, circular crates on the ice provide the same benefit. This goes for the sands of The Barrens, too. 

Tip 4: Open every chest, especially Legendary ones

There are hundreds of loot chests in God of War: Ragnarok, and the red and Legendary golden ones always provide some valuable crafting materials on top of their equipment rewards. If you see a chest, be sure to take a few moments to open it, even if it's locked behind a puzzle. Your future self will thank you. Just keep in mind that you may need specific items (like the Draupnir Spear) to reach them, which become available later in the game.

Tip 5: Consider your build before you craft

You won't necessarily know what kind of playstyle you want to use early on, but because all equipment can level to a maximum of nine, anything can be viable if you invest in it. However, because of the massive expense that comes with crafting, you'll want to consider every option before you dedicate resources to your weapons and armor.

Tip 6: Do as much side content as you can

You can probably shotgun your way through God of War: Ragnarok's main story in about 15 hours, but you'll be under-geared and miss out on some of its best content. The side content not only provides you with resources and unique equipment, but it also is a great source of additional experience, boss fights, and a story to enjoy. There's plenty of Hacksilver in it for you as well. Bucketloads, in fact.

Tip 7: Max out your favorite set when you can

To tackle the toughest challenges, you'll want at least some of your equipment to be max level. If you don't want to search every nook and cranny for Frozen Flames and Chaos Flames, then invest in at least your chest piece and one or both of your favorite weapon accessories.

If you can do that, you'll likely be around Gear Rank 7 or higher, putting you within striking distance of the highest-level enemies in the game. Level 9 items are also the only ones you can transmog to look like anything else you currently own; yet another reason to take something to its maximum.

Those are your core concepts in crafting in God of War: Ragnarok. It's a complex set of mechanics that lets you create wacky builds that either can't die, do insane damage, or have some other effect. The more build-makers get into the game; the crazier things will become. For more on where to get all the collectibles, check our guides to the Aurvangar Wetlands and Radsvinn's Rig, among others. Our guides hub has even more to look through.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Best Early Game Armor https://www.gameskinny.com/mtm52/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-early-game-armor https://www.gameskinny.com/mtm52/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-early-game-armor Tue, 15 Nov 2022 12:53:14 -0500 John Schutt

The early parts of God of War: Ragnarok are the most difficult because you have so few tools and so much low-quality equipment supplementing the few things you can do. With armor being the primary driver of early build crafting and ability acquisition, knowing what to upgrade to and when is crucial.

Thankfully, a couple of outstanding armor options available early in the game can give you an edge or at least help keep you alive long enough to learn a bit about what’s kicking in your teeth. Here are the best armor pieces available early in God of War: Ragnarok.

Nidavellir’s Finest Plackart and Set

Healing is at a premium early in a first playthrough of Ragnarok, and anything that can give you extra stats and some easy heals is ideal. Nidavellir’s set does just that, making it the best early-game armor set.

How to Get the Nidavellir Set

Shortly after you get to Svartalfheim, you’ll make your way to the Bay of Bounty, where Mimir will ask a Favor of you: the sidequest In Service of Asgard.

Your task is to destroy three mining towers across the Bay. Doing so awards you experience, currency, and crafting materials, including Nidavellir Ore. You can take the Ore to Sindri or Brok to craft the:

  • Nidavellir’s Finest Plackart Chest Armor
  • Nidavellir’s Finest Arm Guards
  • Nidavellir’s Finest Waist Guard

We highly recommend completing the Favor and preparing the whole set.

The Plackart is the most important because with it equipped, your Stun Grabs (finishers activated by pressing the right R3 stick) activate a two-second Health Burst. It doesn’t matter if you kill the enemy with the grab or not; the burst happens either way.

The Nidavellir’s Wrist and Waist Guards reduce the rate at which an enemy’s Stun gauge degrades by 50% with one equipped or 100% with two. This pairs nicely with the chest-piece, giving you much more time to apply enough Stun status to let the grab occur.

Sol’s Spaulders of Courage

Melee — or fist — damage is one of the cores of combat in God of War: Ragnarok, and Sol’s Spaulders of Courage make it much more powerful. They also provide a significant boost to your Vitality stat, which directly governs the amount of health you have.

How to Get Sol's Spaulders of Courage

You’ll have your chance to acquire Sol’s Spaulders once you reach Chapter 4: The Reckoning, which takes you to Vanaheim. Crafting them only takes 5,000 Hacksilver (if you need more, here's how to get it), so if you’ve saved up a little, make them right away.

The Spaulders increase your melee damage based on how much Rage meter you have and will spend Rage rather than Health if taking damage would otherwise kill you. Paired with some upgraded Nidavellir’s Wrist and Waist Guards, you’ll not only be dealing tons of damage, your enemy Stun gauge will have a hard time depleting, making a quick finisher that much easier.

We recommend crafting those two armors early in God of War: Ragnarok and upgrading them if they suit your playstyle. There are plenty of other great options as you approach late and endgame, but if you’re looking for something consistent you can get within a few hours, these two sets are our picks. For much more on God of War: Ragnarok, including a zone-by-zone set of collectibles guides, check out our guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — How to Get the Draupnir Spear https://www.gameskinny.com/6or05/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-get-the-draupnir-spear https://www.gameskinny.com/6or05/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-get-the-draupnir-spear Tue, 15 Nov 2022 12:43:54 -0500 John Schutt

The Draupnir Spear is the third weapon in your arsenal and the new weapon you receive in God of War: Ragnarok. It's not only a great addition to your collection, but it has exploration uses as well. You've likely seen little green valves spraying out jets of air across the Nine Realms, many of which hide pathways to various collectibles. Jam a spear in there and climb on it, and a new area opens. Those glowing yellow cracks in rock faces all over the place? Jam a spear in there and detonate it.

Thankfully, getting your hands on the Darupnir Spear is easy if drawn out. Just know you'll be backtracking to previous areas if you're going for 100% completion.

Where is the Draupnir Spear?

You are guaranteed to get the Draupnir Spear during your playthrough of God of War: Ragnarok, as forging it is part of the main quest. You get the Spear as part of the Forging Destiny main story quest, chapter six, specifically.

You're on the right track when Brok makes a racket about going to see The Lady back in Svartalfheim. You'll start by making your way out of an alcohol storage facility deep in the mountain, then go to a lift blocked by Nightmare Haunts you'll need to break. Shatter each nest until you can destroy the one sitting on the lift, then take it further up the mountain.

After solving another geyser puzzle, you'll travel up further until you reach a calm lake with a large helmet sitting above a jetty. Brok will ask you to follow him beneath the helmet, but the switch is broken.

You'll now need to collect two pieces of magical metals from the ore deposit across from where Brok is working. If you do a 180 from facing his workstation, you'll see a large blue rock formation from which you can chop a shard.

Once given, Brok will need a piece of copper, which is situated directly to the right of the blue ore. Chop off a bit of the copper and give it to him, then return to the switch and flip it once repaired.

Now it's cutscene time. You'll watch as you and Brock descend into the kelpy water and give the Draupnir ring to the Lady, who then makes the Spear out of it with a little of Kratos's blood. There are other story beats here, but we'll save those for you to discover.

When you return to the surface, you'll have a chance to put the Spear through its paces and learn how it helps with exploration. Whether you continue the story now that a lot of new optional locations are open to looting is up to you, but you have the tools to loot them regardless.

That's all there is to getting your hands on the Draupnir Spear. Know that you have a lot of game ahead of you after forging it, and you'll have a whole new skill tree to unlock with the tons of XP you likely have at this point. For more coverage of God of War: Ragnarok, including articles giving a zone-by-zone rundown of all the collectibles in the game, check out our guides hub.

]]>
Harvestella: Quietus and Quietus Dungeon Location https://www.gameskinny.com/tjolc/harvestella-quietus-and-quietus-dungeon-location https://www.gameskinny.com/tjolc/harvestella-quietus-and-quietus-dungeon-location Tue, 15 Nov 2022 08:38:08 -0500 Josh Broadwell

Quietus in Harvestella is a season and a place, a unique in-between time of the month that closes off most of your opportunities, but opens another, potentially lucrative one: the Quietus dungeon.

Unlike most farming games, where some of your crops carry over to the next season and your life continues on as normal, Harvestella works a bit differently. Aside from putting a stop to nearly every activity, it also hides a mysterious new dungeon for you to explore.

How Quietus in Harvestella Works

Quietus is one day in between each season, neither the last day of one season or the first day of the next. All your crops die during Quietus, so bear that in mind when deciding what to plant and when. If you can afford to, it’s always best to plant your recurring crops – tomatoes, for example – as soon as a new season begins, so you’re guaranteed to get the maximum amount of produce for your money. 

Quietus only affects living things outside, so your animals are safe and will come to no harm during the season.

Everyone stays inside during Quietus and refuses to open their doors, which means you can’t complete quests or relationship events until the day of death is over. Seeing as it’s just the one day for every cycle, this interruption to your normal routine isn’t significantly disruptive, especially as quests have no expiration date. 

Since Quietus doesn’t affect you, you’re free to go about wherever you wish, gathering materials, fighting monsters, and spending your time ticking off tasks you might not otherwise have a chance to complete during normal seasons.

Quietus Dungeon Location

Quietus is also a dungeon in Harvestella, accessible via the well on your farm at Bird’s Eye Brae. This dungeon is a multi-layered one with dozens of wells scattered about on each floor. Peer inside to find treasure, monsters, or a way forward. 

At the time of writing, we’ve yet to make it all the way to the button of the Quietus dungeon. You can only enter when Quietus is active, and since you collapse at midnight regardless of where you are, clearing more than 10 or 15 floors of the dungeon is something you can’t really do until a bit later in the game when you have more food and restorative items.

That's all you need to know about Quietus in Harvestella, but make sure to check out our other Harvestella guides for more tips and tricks!

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Secret of the Sands Favor Walkthrough Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/9iksh/god-of-war-ragnarok-secret-of-the-sands-favor-walkthrough-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/9iksh/god-of-war-ragnarok-secret-of-the-sands-favor-walkthrough-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 20:11:09 -0500 Jonathan Moore

God of War: Ragnarok is chock full of side content, some of the best of which are the various Favors you'll take on as side quests. In Alfheim's The Strond, Atreus will mention hearing a beast in pain somewhere out in the wastes. Being the good and decent animal lover he is, he asks Kratos to investigate, and the old curmudgeon agrees.

This walkthrough guide will cover the Favor from beginning to end, from how to start it to what you'll need to do to free Hafgufa. 

How to Complete the Secret of the Sands Favor

To start the Secret of the Sands Favor, complete the Temple of Light, then speak to Sindri in The Canyons on the way to The Barrens. He’ll say dwarves don’t bother with Elf matters before wishing you luck.

Track the quest, and go left of the camp, where you’ll meet two badass doggos drawing a sled. Ride the sled through the remainder of The Canyons, and go right (east) when you enter The Barrens. Continue east toward the Favor marker to find a cave, its entrance lit with a torch. This takes you to The Below. Go down, and jump over to enter the area proper.

Follow the path right, and use the Blades of Chaos to swing over the gap. Drop down and fight the enemy, then use the Twilight Stone to bounce the Leviathan Axe through the three nodes of the Dark Elf barrier.

Continue forward, taking on the next enemies, then go right through the short tunnel that puts you into a cave. Go left, and fight the enemies, then climb the wall between the archways. Stay right to destroy the three nodes of the Dark Elf barrier and get a red chest and piece of Lore.

Climb back up to where you threw the Axe from to open the Lore chamber, and follow the path up another much taller ledge to reemerge outside. Take the zipline at the arch across the chasm.

Follow the path right, using the grapple points to reach the far ledge, going past the three red nodes of the Dark Elf barrier to the left. On the far ledge, drop down to the right, then turn toward the nodes and use the Twilight Stone to destroy them.

Continue further right (away from the red nodes) to find a Nornir Chest. One Rune Bell is to the left of the chest; raise the nearby gate to reveal another. The third is through the gap left by the three destroyed nodes; use the grapple points to get through the gap, then climb up and right.

There, jump right to a platform. Drop down by going right again, and look up to see the bell on the grate in the "window." Open the gate to the right to make way to ring all three.

Once you’ve gotten the Nornir Chest, go back to Rune Bell on the grate in the window. Use the nearby chain to drop into the cavern below. Go through the very tight tunnel on the north side of the cave, then destroy the gold barrier on the other side.

Drop down, and forge ahead. There will be three Dark Elf barriers in this area. Defeat the Wretches, and destroy the first barrier on the right, using the Twilight Stone on the left side of the barrier.

Go through that barrier, jump the gap, then immediately turn left to see a gold barrier across from you. Destroy that. Now go to the side where the gold barrier was, and use another bit of Twilight Stone on the left to destroy the second red Dark Elf barrier in this area.

Jump the gap, climb the wall, and turn right. Grab the red chest, then turn the hanging Twilight Stone right once, so that it faces right, toward where the first red barrier was.

Now drop down, and go through the newly opened pathway. Defeat the enemies, and use the grapple point to reach a cave where you’ll climb up. At the top, you’ll meet Hafgufa, the animal you’ve been after

How to Free Hafgufa

You’ll need to break the two Dark Elf barriers binding Hafgufa. One is to the left of the beast, while another is underneath him in the middle, closest to the cliff you’re standing on.

Look up to the left one first. Aim your Axe in the extreme top middle of the Twilight Stone, almost off of the stone itself, so that it ricochets through the first node, then off another piece of Twilight Stone to hit the second and third nodes.

Destroy the gold barrier on the left side of the area, then jump the gap. Turn right to face the lower red nodes; beyond the closest node to you, you’ll notice a bit of Twilight Stone. Aim your axe roughly in the middle of the red node closest to you, so that it goes through and deflects off the Twilight Stone, hitting the other two red nodes.

Once you’ve done that, a pathway will open on the right side of the area. Follow the path, and climb up. Then use the Blades of Chaos to bust through the ceiling at the end of the path.

Grab the Legendary Chest on the left side of the room, then destroy the single red node on the right side before climbing up into The Barrens. Make sure to retrack the quest if the marker disappears; it disappeared for me after freeing Hafgufa. Use the sled to go to the marker, and destroy the tether keeping the cage shut.

With the Secret of the Sands Favor complete, you'll be halfway to a silver trophy and open up The Barrens for exploration. There are plenty of collectibles and materials to find in the area, so it's well worth the effort. For more tips, head over to our God of War: Ragnarok guides page, where you'll find more walkthroughs. 

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — The Below Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/mci6x/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-below-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/mci6x/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-below-collectibles-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 19:08:26 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Throughout your early time in Alfheim, which comes during the Groa's Secret quest, you'll hear Atreus remark on being able to hear an animal in distress somewhere nearby. After completing The Temple of Light, you'll have the opportunity to explore beyond The Strond, taking The Canyons to The Barrens, an area engulfed in a fierce sandstorm. To clear The Barrens in God of War: Ragnarok, you'll need to first visit The Below.

It's likely that you're already on the path there if you spoke to Sindri in The Canyons and picked up the Secret of the Sands Favor. Simply track the side quest and head to the marker to descend into the depths.

There are only three collectibles to find here, though they are well worth seeking out. Here's what you can expect to pick up:

  • x1 Lore Rune
  • x1 Nornir Chest
  • x1 Legendary Chest

Alfheim: The Below Collectibles Locations

Lore Rune (Patience)

After the first Dark Elf barrier in The Below, near the entrance to the area, go through the short tunnel into the caves. Turn left, and you’ll see an archway ahead, with Twilight Stone to the right and left, as well as another archway to the right.

Climb up the wall between the archways, then turn right twice. Destroy the three nodes of the Dark Elf barrier, then drop down twice. Grab the red chest ahead, and turn right for the Runes on the wall.

Nornir Chest

  • Reward: Idunn Apple Health Increase

From the Lore Runes, turn around and climb up to the ledge you stood on to destroy the three nodes. Go left, and climb up the much taller ledge to go back outside. Use the zipline. Go right once on the other side, and use the grapple points to go straight across.

Drop down to the right, and turn right to use the Twilight Stone to destroy the three red barrier nodes. From here, turn left to see the Nornir Chest; open the nearby gate.

  • Rune Bell 1: While two bells are near the chest and easy to find, this one is a bit more involved and is the first that should be rung. Go back up to the grapple points, and use them to go through the gap where the red nodes were. Grapple right, then climb the wall up and right. Jump to a platform to the right, then drop down. You’ll see the Rune Bell suspended in the window above; open the gate to the right first.
  • Rune Bell 2: To the left of the Nornir Chest.
  • Rune Bell 3: On the left side of the chamber through the gate by the Nornir Chest.

Legendary Chest

  • Reward: Shoulder Straps of Radiance.

After freeing Hafgufa and getting the silver trophy for the task, take the path that opens on the right side of the area. Follow it, and climb up near the red chest. Go through the tunnel, then use the Blades of Chaos to bust through the ceiling at the end. The Chest will be on the left side of the room.

Those are all of the collectibles in The Below region of Alfheim. For more, consider heading over to our God of War: Ragnarok guides page

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — The Canyons Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/rc2ik/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-canyons-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/rc2ik/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-canyons-collectibles-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 18:42:45 -0500 Jonathan Moore

There are hundreds of collectibles to find in God of War: Ragnarok, with each of its main regions split into smaller sub-regions. The Canyons is a small area in the Alfheim region connecting The Strond with The Barrens, two places you'll go during and after the Groa's Secret story quest. There are three collectibles to gather here. 

Here's what you can expect to find: 

  • x1 Treasure Map
  • x1 Odin's Raven
  • x1 Lore Marker

Alfheim: The Canyons Collectibles Locations

Treasure Map (Vulture’s Gold)

From the Mystic Gateway in The Strond, go through the archway on the right to enter the canyon leading to The Barrens. The Treasure Map will be on the ground by a dead Dark Elf at the first right turn.

Odin’s Raven

Continue forward on the path, and destroy the Dark Elf barrier at the end. Climb up the wall to the right, then look right of the camp ahead. You’ll see the Raven flying over the palisade wall.

Lore Marker (U-Natur-Liker)

From the Raven, look to the left of the camp to see the Lore Marker by a palisade wall, a column, and some cliffs. 

Those are all of the collectibles in The Canyons of Alfheim in God of War: Ragnarok. With these in hand, you'll be one step closer to 100% completion and, with this Raven, one step closer to getting the Hilt of Forsbrandr, which is needed for The Collector trophy. For more, head over to our Ragnarok guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Temple of Light Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/4v0qm/god-of-war-ragnarok-temple-of-light-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/4v0qm/god-of-war-ragnarok-temple-of-light-collectibles-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 12:33:17 -0500 Jonathan Moore

You'll first reach Alfheim's Temple of Light location in God of War: Ragnarok during the Groa's Secret story quest. Unlike most of the other areas you've explored up to this point, you'll be able to get all of the collectibles in the Temple of Light during this quest. Try to pick these all up your first time through, as there's no Mystic Gateway to return for some time. 

Here's what you can expect to find: 

  • x1 Nornir Chest
  • x2 Lore
  • x2 Odin's Ravens
  • x2 Artifacts
  • x3 Legendary Chests

Alfheim: Temple of Light Collectibles Locations

Lore Scroll (The Bifrost Bridge)

From the statue, go right and open the door. Follow the path, then swing over and go right up the stairs. Then go through another door, up the stairs, then through a third door. You’ll fight several enemies here, then Tyr will help you swing over on two bronze panels up to a ledge.

At the top, go right, up the stairs, then left up more stairs. At the top of the stairs, look left to see a ledge, then drop down and follow the path left all the way to the end. The Scroll is on the ground.

Legendary Chest 1

  • Reward: Hades Retribution Light Runic Attack.

From the scroll, turn around, and drop down the ledge to the right. Turn left to see the Legendary Chest.

Odin’s Raven 1

From the Chest, go back up the ledge, and go left. You’ll see the Raven behind a grate. Use the crystal to the left to bounce the Leviathan Axe behind the grate for the collectible.

Artifact (Kvasir’s Poems – Visions After Rest)

From the Raven, go right and back up the ledge. Then go left and up the stairs to the top. Turn right to essentially double back, then climb up the ledge. Follow the path around to the left to find the Artifact at the end. You’ll need to reach this area to open the gate.

Legendary Chest 2

  • Reward: Hilt of Gram Relic.

Open the gate, and defeat the enemies. Go up to the right, going up the stairs; you’ll be following Tyr at this point. Go through the door at the top of the stairs, then up another set of stairs. At the top, go left to drop down off the ledge. There will be a mechanism on the floor; turn right and go through the door.

Interact with the chain on the other side, and use the crystal that appears to raise the elevator. Release the mechanism, then call the Leviathan Axe back. Then drop down, and the Chest will be in front of you.

Artifact (Kvasir’s Poems – Spirits Within Walls)

From the Chest, climb back up the wall, and defeat the enemies. Go through the door, then left to interact with the floor mechanism. Lower it once, then use the Leviathan Axe to destroy the crystal powering the gate. Go through the gate, then left to find this on a table.

Legendary Chest 3

  • Reward: Rune-Engraved Release.

From there, follow the path through the hallway and a door. Fight the Elves on the other side before knocking down the metal plate on the left edge of the area (left of the door you entered).

You’ll see several hanging plates you can grapple to and the Legendary Chest near a light door on the other side. Use the grapple point to get to the tower on the left side, then destroy the crystal powering the light door to gain access to the Chest.

Nornir Chest

  • Reward: Horn of Blood Mead Rage Increase.

Push the statues down to create the first light bridge and cross it. The Nornir Chest will be on the other side, on the right.

  • Rune Bell 1: On a balcony to the left of the Nornir Chest
  • Rune Bell 2: On a grate in a small alcove to the right once going through the door to the right of the Chest. Use Atreus’ Sonic Arrows to break the green metal to reveal it.
  • Rune Bell 3: Directly to the left of the Chest.

Odin’s Raven 2

Go up the stairs from the Nornir Chest into the next area with the light beam in the middle, and defeat the Elves that appear. Look on the left side of the stairs in the back of the area for the bird perched on a balcony.

Lore Runes (Limitless)

Continue to follow the path up and past the next light door puzzle. You’ll go outside, then reenter into a large chamber with yet another light door. Use Atreus’ Sonic Arrows to break the green metal on the statue to the right of the light door, then use the grapple point it creates. The Lore Runes will be on a wall on the right side of the platform when you land.

And those are all of the collectibles to find in Alfheim's Temple of Light during God of War: Ragnarok's story quest, Groa's Secret. We have plenty more guides covering the locations of Odin's Ravens, Nornir Chests, and more by area over in our Ragnarok guides hub

]]>
Nikke: Goddess of Victory — Best Characters Tier List https://www.gameskinny.com/ovovn/nikke-goddess-of-victory-best-characters-tier-list https://www.gameskinny.com/ovovn/nikke-goddess-of-victory-best-characters-tier-list Mon, 14 Nov 2022 12:21:13 -0500 Sergey_3847

Nikke: Goddess of Victory is sweeping the gacha community between its graphics and addictive gameplay. But of course, you've got to have some top tier units to stay competitive.

Whether you want an easy time or you just want to flex on your friends with your pulls, here's a character tier list to get your unit priorities straight.

S-Tier Characters

Scarlet

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 4,164
  • HP: 583,734

Scarlet is designed specifically to deal as much damage as possible, especially sustained and burst types of damage.

She can also increase her own attack power, which is already high by default, and her critical hit rate with critical damage.

Her best skill is Scarlet Flash, which increases her critical rate and damage once her HP total drops below 50%.

Noah

  • Attack: 17,059
  • Defense: 4,900
  • HP: 711,171

No team can sustain too much damage without the support of a tank character, and Noah is the best tank in the game so far.

She not only has massive HP pool, but she can also boost the defenses of her allies, and debuff all of enemy's attacks as well.

Her best skill is U Mad Bro?, which taunts all enemies and makes all her allies immune to damage for a short period of time.

Volume

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 3,633
  • HP: 583,734

Volume is another great attacker, who can increase her own damage, but also help her team by boosting its critical hit rate.

In order to effectively use Volume, players need to consider two of her skills, such as Drop the Beat and Turn Up the Volume, in a synergy.

Once both are used, all your allies get critical hit chance and critical damage boost, as well as burst skill cooldown time reduction.

A-Tier Characters

Novel

  • Attack: 17,059
  • Defense: 4,364
  • HP: 711,171

Novel is another great tank and a good alternative to Noah. She also has support abilities that buff the attacking power of her allies, which is always useful.

Her best ability is Case Closed, which increases both attack and defenses of her allies, stacking Cornucopia defensive skill up to its maximum.

Novel's only drawback is that her SMG weapon has a shorter range than that of Noah's weapon.

Poli

  • Attack: 17,059
  • Defense: 4,827
  • HP: 711,171

Poli is definitely a unique defender, as she can take a percentage of her ally's damage onto herself, if that ally has low HP. This is possible due to her That's a Good Boy ability.

But her best skill is Poli's Defense Line, which creates a massive shield that protects all her allies, albeit the cooldown on it is pretty steep at 40 seconds.

Julia

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 4,164
  • HP: 583,734

Julia's burst damage is quite amazing, but it needs to be combined with a full stack of her Crescendo ability to give really impressive results.

You can also use her Climax ability that hits five enemies at once with 500% attacking power, but once again with a longer cooldown.

B-Tier Characters

Brid

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 4,164
  • HP: 583,734

Brid is very similar in design to Julia, whose burst damage can be well utilized, but there is a condition that is quite hard to satisfy in order to maintain the necessary amount of damage: Brid needs to stay at full health.

As for her skills, Leak and AZX are the best for specifically targeting enemies with the highest attack and HP.

Guillotine

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 3,539
  • HP: 583,734

Guillotine is the opposite of Brid, as she gets stronger the more HP she loses. Note that Guillotine has no skills that would heal her up in case her HP drops too low.

Also, when she uses her Shroud of Darkness ability, you will see some significant damage increase only after her HP total falls below 70%.

Signal

  • Attack: 25,554
  • Defense: 3,633
  • HP: 583,734

If none of the above units seem cool to you, and you don't mind sacrificing a bit of damage for self-heal ability, then Signal is the right choice.

Her Waiting for Signal passive skill automatically recovers her own lost HP, but only when a full burst damage is activated.

Those are the best characters in Nikke: Goddess of Victory, and stay tuned for more.

]]>
Sonic Frontiers: True Ending and Final Boss Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dcvob/sonic-frontiers-true-ending-and-final-boss-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/dcvob/sonic-frontiers-true-ending-and-final-boss-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 08:56:43 -0500 Sergey_3847

Most Sonic Frontiers players will encounter the first Final Boss at the end of the game. But many are not aware that there is one more secret boss, which can be encountered after unlocking the true ending of the game.

Our guide will not only provide you with tips on how to unlock the true ending in Sonic Frontiers, but also show you how to beat the secret final boss.

How to Unlock True Ending

The key to unlocking the true ending in Sonic Frontiers is straightforward: you simply need to finish the game in Hard Mode.

Fortunately, you don't need to play the whole game in Hard Mode. You can just switch to Hard before collecting the last Chaos Emerald at the Ouranos Island.

If you do everything right, the game will keep going after you fight the first Final Boss, and the true ending with the secret boss fight will be unlocked.

How to Beat True Final Boss

The true final boss of Sonic Frontiers is simply called The End. The entire battle is designed as a 2D space shooter against a dark planetoid.

Sonic in his Super Sonic form can use two types of projectiles to defeat The End: Light Shots and Dark Shots. You can also avoid The End's own projectiles by pressing up, down, left, or right.

But there is a much faster way of defeating The End, and all you need to do is follow these tips:

  • Counter The End's shots with your own: Once the boss shoots his Dark Shots, use your own Dark Shots against his. The same applies to Light Shots.
  • Discharge a laser at The End: If you counter his shots enough times correctly, then your laser gauge will start filling up. Then, you can discharge a powerful laser at The End, dealing massive damage to his health.

Repeat these two actions as many times as needed, and once The End's HP pool drops below 10%, a short custcene with a simple QTE action will follow. Then, you can be sure that the game is truly over.

That's all you need to know about the true ending and final boss in Sonic Frontiers. If you were looking for a guide on how to light speed dash in Sonic Frontiers, then follow the provided link, or head over to our Frontiers guide hub for more.

]]>
Soulstone Survivors: Best Builds Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/l2rro/soulstone-survivors-best-builds-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/l2rro/soulstone-survivors-best-builds-guide Mon, 14 Nov 2022 08:47:24 -0500 Sergey_3847

Getting the right build in Soulstone Survivors guarantees a solid run through all the Curses of the game. However, some classes have a far better chance of getting you there much faster and more effectively than others.

Our guide will show you some of the best builds in Soulstone Survivors that have shown great results at various stages of the game.

Elementalist Lightning Build

Beam damage is strikingly powerful in Soulstone Survivors, and Elementalist's beams come not only with massive damage, but also with some hurtful status effects. In this build it is combined with lightning damage.

Weapon

  • Scepter of Thunder.

This weapon fires a directed beam at enemies dealing 300 damage, and applies Dazed status effect.

Active Abilities

  • Lightning Beam.
  • Call Lightning.
  • Chain Lightning.
  • Holy Fire.
  • Lightning Bolt.
  • Thunder Strike.

All these abilities accumulate the maximum power of critical strikes and lightning damage, except Holy Fire, which sends a wave of holy fire dealing 500 damage to all affected enemies.

Passive Abilities

  • Area of Effect.
  • Desperation.
  • Impending Doom.

These will help you increase the damage from both Burn and Dazed status effects.

Pyromancer Burn Build

Fire damage is the most widely used type of damage in Soulstone Survivors, and every player has access to a huge selection of burn spells. Here we concentrate on the best of them.

Weapon

  • Pyromancer's Firestarter.

This is the most powerful fire weapon in the game that sends a massive burning slash at enemies dealing 50 damage a hit.

Active Abilities

  • Fire Slash.
  • Explosive Trap.
  • Fire Bolt.
  • Fire Wall.
  • Flame Wave.
  • Meteor.
  • Meteor Shower.

Burn your enemies at a distance, and hurl meteorites upon their heads. This strategy is as simple as it gets, and fun as well.

Passive Abilities

  • Damage Increase.
  • Desperation.
  • Fire Shield.
  • Spontaneous Combustion.
  • Thermal Shock.

All these abilities will further increase your burn damage, and apply extra negative status effects, if Burn damage was applied. Fire Shield will also protect you in case enemies get too close.

Sentinel Huntress Build

If you want to keep safe distance from the enemies, deal high ranged damage, and stun all your enemies, then Sentinel would be the ideal choice.

Weapon

  • Huntress Bow.

This weapon shoots many arrows simultaneously, hitting groups of enemies, dealing a total of 560 damage with Stun status effect applied each time.

Active Abilities

  • Rain of Arrows.
  • Flame Wave.
  • Glacier.
  • Meteor.
  • Meteor Shower.
  • Thunder Clap.
  • Thunder Strike.

Sentinel can effectively utilize various types of damage, including fire, lightning, ice, and magical to deal with all types of enemies in the most effective way.

Passive Abilities

  • Area of Effect.
  • Damage Increase.

Both of these modifiers can be very useful in the Huntress build, which will not only increase the overall damage but also widen the hit zone of your weapon.

Barbarian Bleed Build

On its own the Barbarian class can be tough to handle, and even the infamous Slam attack can be quite slow at times when it comes to the cooldown times. But with the carefully selected Bleed modifiers, this build can easily take you through all the Curses.

Weapon

  • Tribal War Axes.

The style of this weapon would be best described as hack-and-slash. Although it can only be used at close range, the Bleed chance is high and quite devastating.

Active Abilities

  • Double Slash.
  • Eviscerate.
  • Flurry.
  • Shrapnel Bomb.
  • Subdue.
  • Thrust.

You will mostly handle enemies at close range when using this build, but such skills like Flurry and Shrapnel Bomb also allow you to reach enemies standing much further from you.

Passive Abilities

  • Brutal Strikes.
  • Gangrene.
  • Poisonous Blood.

Note that Gangrene passive skill synergizes specifically with the Subdue active ability, where Fragility effect triggers extra Bleed damage.

Hound Master Ranged Build

You may want to take care of your own safety and try to deal damage by staying away from the enemies as much as possible. This ranged build for the Hound Master is perfect for that purpose.

Weapon

  • Riflemen's Vengeance.

Although this weapon deals only 150 damage in comparison to that of Elementalist, you don't need to be anywhere near your enemies to hit them up with it.

Active Abilities

  • Power Blast.
  • Holy Fire.
  • Meteor.
  • Meteor Shower.
  • Thunder Clap.
  • Thunder Strike.

You can also use any other holy fire or lightning based abilities that are excellent for high ranged damage.

Passive Abilities

  • Area of Effect.
  • Damage Increase.
  • Fire Shield.

This ability will protect you every time an enemy decides to approach you, applying Burn damage.

Those are the best builds in Soulstone Survivors, and stay tuned for more!

]]>
God of War Ragnarok: Best Skills to Unlock Early https://www.gameskinny.com/xa5s5/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-skills-to-unlock-early https://www.gameskinny.com/xa5s5/god-of-war-ragnarok-best-skills-to-unlock-early Sun, 13 Nov 2022 21:58:56 -0500 John Schutt

There are dozens of weapon and Companion skills in God of War: Ragnarok, and you'll spend most of the game earning the ability to use them all. The good thing is this game's combat is already engrossing without many unlocks, so the real decision is which you pick up first.

You'll have access to the Leviathan Axe and the Blades of Chaos from early in a playthrough following the brief introductory chapter, so your main limitation is how many skill points you want to invest. We'll give you a selection of the best skills to unlock early across both Kratos' and Atreus' trees.

You earn the ability to unlock skills for both the Leviathan Axe and the Blades of Chaos whenever you upgrade them, though the materials to do so come slowly throughout the campaign. Atreus' bow skills open up naturally as you play, though we'll only be covering his initial tree here.

Best Early Leviathan Axe Skills

Our focus here is on both ease of use and consistency. The Leviathan Axe is a damage monster, so the skills we unlock should bolster that however we can.

Serpent's Snare

  • Unlocks at Leviathan Axe Upgrade 2.
  • Costs 1,000xp to purchase.

Replacing the overhead chop from the 2018 title, Serpent's Snare maintains its stagger on larger enemies with the added benefit of tossing mobs around and making them explode into frost on impact. This skill is great for clearing rooms or getting one final hit on a boss.

Freezing Throw I and II

  • Freezing Throw I:
    • Unlocked and purchased at the start of the game.
  • Feezing Throw II
    • Unlocked at the start of the game.
    • Costs 750xp to purchase.

There are two big reasons to invest in Freezing Throw. The first is the massive Frost status buildup you'll cause on his enemies and the ability to freeze smaller foes in place.

Fighting four enemies instead of five for a little while is always good, and both the impact and the dislodging deal damage. The second reason is the Frost explosion on hit. It's great for spreading the status, but it can also help you damage breakable objects that would otherwise be just out of reach, like explosive pots near breakable debris.

Frozen Ascent

  • Unlocks at Leviathan Axe Upgrade 2.
  • Costs 750xp to purchase. 

Combos are king in combat in God of War: Ragnarok. Frozen Ascent is an excellent combo ender and an opener, stunning most foes and allowing you to do more damage than would otherwise be possible.

Best Blades of Chaos Skills to Unlock Early

We're all about speed with the Blades of Chaos and dealing with enemies otherwise out of reach of the Leviathan Axe.

Hyperion Grapple

  • Unlocked at the start of the game.
  • Costs 750xp to purchase.

You'd be surprised by how often you'll be able to land Hyperion Grapple in the middle of a fight, and the shoulder check inflicts heavy Stun damage while allowing you to reposition as part of an attack. That makes it not only a powerful status builder but also a mobility tool.

Chaotic Rampage

  • Unlocked at the start of the game.
  • Costs 750xp to purchase.

The Blades of Chaos don't have great single-target damage, but Chaotic Rampage goes a long way toward helping them in that department. The real reason to grab this early is to get its Skill Labor completed, so it's all the more potent when you unlock its upgrade path.

Immolation

  • Unlocks at Blades of Chaos Upgrade 2.
  • Costs 500xp to purchase.

With the high speed and area of effect the Blades of Chaos have, you're likely to build quite a bit of Immolation gauge, and the bonus to both Luck and Runic, while the skill is active, can be immensely useful, especially with builds that rely on those stats.

Best Atreus Skills to Unlock Early

You won't have access to many of Atreus' skills early in the game, but the two listed here will make combat much more comfortable no matter what point in the story you're in.

Stranglehold I

  • Unlocked at the start of the game.
  • Costs 1,000xp to purchase.

Returning from the 2018 game, Stranglehold is exactly what it sounds like: Atreus holds a trash mob enemy in a stranglehold with his bow, giving you a chance to deal damage or at least remove an enemy from the field for a little while.

Watchful Protector

  • Unlocked at the start of the game.
  • Costs 750xp to purchase.

One benefit of being an NPC companion in God of War: Ragnarok is you can't die to enemy damage. Watchful Protector uses this mechanic to your advantage by allowing Atreus to draw some enemy aggression when you are overwhelmed. It's not enough in a big group, but plenty in most encounters.

You'll want to invest in those eight skills early in God of War: Ragnarok. You'll unlock many more active and passive skills as you play, but you'll spend hours between upgrades, so maximizing what you can do in the early stages is essential. For more on God of War: Ragnarok — and there will be much more — check out our guides hub.

]]>
God of War Ragnarok: How to Parry https://www.gameskinny.com/o8d4z/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-parry https://www.gameskinny.com/o8d4z/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-parry Sun, 13 Nov 2022 21:42:28 -0500 John Schutt

Early on in God of War Ragnarok, there are few ways to make the game significantly easier. The one mechanic you have in your arsenal that can turn the tide of battle is the parry. With precise timing and specific shields, a successful parry nullifies most attacks and can stagger any enemy in the game.

When you reach the endgame of God of War: Ragnarok, there are lots of ways to trivialize the difficulty. You can build into survivability or massive damage, making what would otherwise be impossible fights incredibly simple. Early on, not so much. We'll go over how to parry in this guide, the best places to practice, and which shield you should use.

Parrying Explained

The actual mechanics of parrying in God of War: Ragnarok are simple. When specific attacks are about to hit Kratos, press L1; if you do it right, Kratos will deflect the strike with his arm swung wide to the left. You'll also hear a loud, low clang sound, and the game will momentarily slow down, giving you a chance for additional counterattacks.

The catch with parrying is every attack has different timing, and not all shields can do it. You have to check the shield's description in the menu for its secondary ability. If it can parry, it will say so. Other shields have other useful abilities, but they'll only be able to block, not counter, incoming attacks.

You'll know you can parry an attack if the following is true: the attack has either no yellow circle around it, or it does. If the attack does not have a yellow circle, it can be blocked normally if you aren't yet comfortable with the timing. Yellow circle attacks are guard crushes, and if they hit you, Kratos will be staggered for about a second and be open for any second or third hits.

In most cases, you have a larger parry window than you think, but it's only about a half second. With a bit of practice, you'll be able to parry slower attacks on reaction, even if you've never seen the move before. For regular attacks without a yellow circle, you can also do what's called a setup parry: block the first hit in the combo, then immediately parry the second as it lands.

Guard crushes are riskier, as they tend to do more damage if you miss the parry window and shouldn't be blocked. The window itself isn't usually any smaller than a standard attack's, but unless you're confident you can land the parry, we recommend dodging these until you have the health to tank a few hits. Never try to parry a red circle attack. These are unblockable and should only be avoided or otherwise i-framed.

Where to Practice Parrying

Ideally, you'll practice parrying as you play through the game, particularly on trash mobs you fight wherever you're either in a story or side quest or are otherwise out exploring. The best way is to save early-game content for later so you can return to it with better gear and abilities to mitigate incoming damage.

For a more "controlled" environment, go to Niflheim when it becomes available midway through the campaign. The first area you unlock, The Raven Tree, is primarily a training arena where you fight an endless horde of various enemy types with no real consequence for failure. Summon some base-level Draugr or grim and practice the basics.

The Best Shield for Parrying

The best shield for parrying in God of War: Ragnarok is the Guardian Shield, the shield Kratos starts the game with. You lose access to it early on and are forced to use the Dauntless Shield in its stead if parrying is your goal.

The Guardian Shield is the best because the secondary R1 or R2 right bumper and trigger attacks can stagger enemies and return projectiles at the one that fired them. If you're good at parrying and care less about consistent counterattacks, the Dauntless Shield's empowered Shield Bash on a perfectly timed parry is quite nice. You have to be incredibly precise, and the Guardian Shield is easier to use overall.

That's about everything you need to know about parrying in God of War: Ragnarok. It's not an exact science, and it does take a bit of skill to pull off consistently, but it's not the most difficult thing to do, either. There will be plenty of other God of War articles coming in the near future, so check our guides hub for more.

]]>
God of War Ragnarok: How to Beat the Hateful https://www.gameskinny.com/jb3kz/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-beat-the-hateful https://www.gameskinny.com/jb3kz/god-of-war-ragnarok-how-to-beat-the-hateful Sun, 13 Nov 2022 21:37:27 -0500 John Schutt

There are dozens of different world bosses scattered throughout God of War: Ragnarok, and one of the first you'll encounter is a powerful draugr called The Hateful. You'll fight this fire-using boss six times as part of the Born From Fire Favor sidequest, and each encounter is more difficult than the last. The Hateful moves quickly, hits hard, and tends to summon friends when put on the back foot.

We'll catalog every one of the Hateful's attacks in this guide so you're armed with how to deal with whatever the undead beast can throw at you.

Two things to keep in mind about The Hateful. First, like all enemies in God of War: Ragnarok, its attacks can cover a deceptively long distance, so you never want to underestimate whether an attack will connect or not. Always assume that it will be able to hit you, even if you're halfway across from the arena.

Second, like all enemies in the game, The Hateful is vulnerable to parrying, but it has some mix-ups to deal with parry spammers. Whether it leads with two standard attacks or two yellow circle attacks, it will almost always close with an unblockable you'll need to dodge. Timing and quick attack identification are paramount, as the Hateful quickly punishes sloppy counter attempts.

The Hateful's Attacks

The Hateful doesn't have the largest repertoire of attacks nor any additional phases, but what it does deals an unhealthy amount of damage and is faster than you'd think.

Running Chop

This unblockable attack, noted by the red circle around The Hateful when it starts the animation, sees the boss run toward you with its ax raised over its head. After traveling about five meters or so, or when it reaches you, the ax comes down, causing a small explosion and sending a line of fire directly away from the boss. Dodge to the side just before the attack would land to avoid taking damage.

Charged Uppercut

Another unblockable, The Hateful, brings its right-hand ax low across its body and slashes upward after a brief windup. If the attack connects, it will send Kratos flying and inflict Burn. Dodging away from the boss is liable to see the attack connect, so dodge roll to The Hateful's left and behind it for best results.

Stomp into Double Uppercut

A third unblockable that usually comes out when the boss is some distance from you, The Hateful starts by stomping its foot on the ground, then rushing across the arena before swinging its axes across its body. As with the charged uppercut, you can dodge to the left to avoid the initial swings, but this attack tends to immediately transition into a guard break or standard combo, so stay on your toes.

Triple Slash

A set of three slower slashes, The Hateful usually uses this attack as a combo extender but can also do it from a standstill. The slashes are easy to reaction parry, and they aren't guard breakers, so if you'd rather play defensively, you can. Our best recommendation is to block the first swing and then parry the second. If you fail, the third slash comes out fast enough to catch you before you can get your shield up again.

Single into Double Ax Slash

This attack is almost always a combo extender, usually following one of The slower unblockables. Once you dodge the unblockable part of the combo, The Hateful immediately turns around and slashes with one ax, followed by a slow slash with both axes. You can block the first part of the attack, but the two-handed swing is a guard crush, so you can parry it or dodge it. Trying to block it will see you staggered and vulnerable.

Dash Slash into Unblockable Uppercut

The Hateful is a big fan of dashing around its arenas, and this attack takes advantage of the boss's mobility. The Hateful will dash at you and swing for a single guard crush, but then, if you dodged the attack, immediately turn and slash upward as an unblockable. This attack tends to come out when you aren't in a good position to parry, so while you can do so to negate the unblockable follow-up, if you're caught off guard, just keep dodging.

Mobility

The Hateful is a very mobile boss and likes to dash to the side out of your line of sight. About midway through the fight with it, two standard draugr enemies will also spawn, forcing you to prioritize the lesser foes over the boss.

Keep your head on a swivel when fighting The Hateful, and use your dodges liberally. It's one of the better bosses to practice parrying on, but because it hits so hard, you should only try when you're sure you can land the counter.

Armed with this knowledge, hopefully, fighting The Hateful will be a bit easier. Dying against this boss, especially in your early encounters with it, is nothing to be ashamed of, as it's harder than some of the story fights in God of War: Ragnarok's early game. For more guides about Kratos's latest adventure, check out our guides hub.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Lyngbakr Island Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/ghj11/god-of-war-ragnarok-lyngbakr-island-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/ghj11/god-of-war-ragnarok-lyngbakr-island-collectibles-guide Sat, 12 Nov 2022 16:19:35 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Svartalfheim is God of War: Ragnarok's first big, open area, full of places to explore during and between main story quests. Within this region is the Bay of Bounty, which you'll reach after visiting Nidavellir, and it's full of smaller sub-areas like Lyngbakr Island. However, you will likely be unable to explore much of the island or get any of its collectibles the first time you visit it. 

To open the island to further exploration, you'll need to start the Weight of Chains Favor by visiting the locked door at The Watchtower west of Radsvinn's Rig; be sure to grab the collectibles at The Watchtower while you're there. Once you start the Favor, you'll gain access to the full extent of Lyngbakr Island.

Note: Unlike some other areas in God of War: Ragnarok, you can get all of the collectibles during the Weight of Chains Favor. 

Here's what you can expect to find:

  • x1 Lore Marker
  • x1 Odin's Raven
  • x1 Legendary Chest

Svartalfheim: Lyngbakr Island Collectibles Locations

Lore Marker (Regarding the Removal of Resources)

Dock on the island's south side (after using the drum in the Favor), climb the wall, defeat the enemies, and cut the first set of chains. Then follow the path back to where you climbed up initially, and jump the gap to its right. Defeat the enemies in the path, and climb the chain on the right. Turn right at the top to see it.

Artifact (Kvasir's Poems – We Who Remain Pt.2)

From the Lore Marker, turn around and climb up the wall in front of you. Turn left at the top, then use your Blades to grapple across the gap. Continue forward, then jump another gap. Interact with the body to the right.

Odin's Raven

After you pick up the Firebomb during the Favor, destroy the gold barrier near the chain you climbed to find the Lore Marker. Jump the gap, and follow the path through the tunnel on the right. Look left when you emerge to see the Raven perched on the cliffs.

Legendary Chest: Reward: Rond of Aggravation)

After cutting the third tether on the island's tail, use the zipline to reach a lower area to cut the chain. The Legendary Chest will be in front of you, to the right, when you land.

Those are all of the collectibles to find on Lyngbakr Island. Be sure to visit Radsvinn's Rig, Althjof's Rig, and Dragon Beach while you're in the area, too, before heading off to the mines. Visit our God of War: Ragnarok guides hub for more tips.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — The Watchtower Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/bz22i/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-watchtower-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/bz22i/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-watchtower-collectibles-guide Sat, 12 Nov 2022 02:04:02 -0500 Jonathan Moore

God of War: Ragnarok is full of little places to explore, and The Watchtower is one of them. Situated on the landbridge leading into the Bay of Bounty, northeast of Modvitnir's Rig, it's easy to pass by without much thought, especially if you're first visiting the area during Mimir's "In Service of Asgard" Favor. Besides being home to one of Sindri's forges, there are two collectibles to pick up here.

Here's what you can expect to find:  

  • x1 Draugr Hole
  • x1 Odin's Raven

Svartalfheim: The Watchtower Collectibles Locations

Draugr Hole

Land on The Watchtower's northern beach, and go right, away from Sindri Forge. You'll see a gold barrier blocking your way up. Use the Leviathan Axe to blow up the explosive pot in the barricade, then climb the wall. Stay left, and follow the path up to the right. Defeat The Hateful and its minions for a collectible, Chaos Spark, and other items.

Odin’s Raven

Still at the Draugr Hole, look south and be patient. The Raven will fly up over the pit from this direction, which is the best way to hit it, as well.

And that's that for the collectibles at The Watchtower. Simple and easy. Be sure to head over to the three mining rigs in the area, while you're here: Althjof's Rig, Radsvinn's Rig, and Modvitnir's Rig to complete a Favor and get more treasures toward several of Ragnarok's trophies. 

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Radsvinn's Rig Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/iuqua/god-of-war-ragnarok-radsvinns-rig-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/iuqua/god-of-war-ragnarok-radsvinns-rig-collectibles-guide Sat, 12 Nov 2022 01:37:34 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Svartalfheim is God of War: Ragnarok's first semi-open-world area, composed of 13 different sub-areas. One of those is Radsvinn's Rig in the Bay of Bounty. As you explore Nidavellir, you'll run into a character named Raeb in the Tavern. They'll give you the "In Service of Asgard" Favor, which will mark three mining rig locations on your map. As with most places in the game, there are several collectibles to find on the rig.

This quick guide will tell you where to find all of the collectibles at this location. You can expect to find:

  • x1 Odin's Raven
  • x1 Lore Scroll
  • x1 Nornir Chest 

Svartalfheim: Radsvinn's Rig Collectibles Locations

Odin’s Raven

Land at the beach for Radsvinn’s Rig, and follow the path left past Sindri’s shop. Climb up the cliff with the Blades of Chaos, and turn left. Look up, and you’ll see the Raven perched on a hook over the water.

Lore Scroll (Climbing the Ladder)

Go to the back of the area behind the smokestack, and look on the ground to the right of the chest by four crates for this Lore Scroll.

Nornir Chest

  • Reward: Idunn Apple Health Upgrade.

This chest is to the left of the smokestack. The runes for this chest are connected to braziers, which you’ll need to ignite either with your Blades of Chaos by pressing L2+R2 or by using the explosive barrels around the area.

  • Rune Brazier 1 is just to the left of the chest.
  • Rune Brazier 2 is in a metal cage opposite the chest. Climb to the top of the half-circle platform by the smokestack, and use your Leviathan Axe to hit the explosive barrel by the brazier.
  • Rune Brazier 3 is behind the smokestack on roughly the same side as the chest. There are two barrels with green sigils leaning next to one another blocking a hole in the wooden wall behind the smokestack (to the left of where you found the Lore Scroll). Use Atreus’ Sonic Arrow ability to destroy them, and ignite the brazier on the other side of the wall.

Those are all of the collectibles on Radsvinn's Rig in God of War: Ragnarok. If you haven't picked them up already, we also have a guide for Althjof's Rig right here, showing you where to find the location's Raven, Legendary Chest, and two bits of Lore.

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — Althjof's Rig Collectibles Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/wy767/god-of-war-ragnarok-althjofs-rig-collectibles-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/wy767/god-of-war-ragnarok-althjofs-rig-collectibles-guide Sat, 12 Nov 2022 01:25:14 -0500 Jonathan Moore

After talking to Raeb in Nidavellir, you'll gain the "In Service of Asgard" Favor, which tasks you with shutting down three mining rigs in the Bay of Bounty. You can continue on to Durlin or explore these areas for collectibles and XP, all while helping Mimir deal with the demons of his past. 

Here's what you can expect to find at this location. There are four collectibles in total, all of which you can gather on your initial visit. 

  • x1 Odin's Raven
  • x1 Legendary Chest
  • x2 Lore

Svartalfheim: Althjof's Rig Collectibles Locations

Odin's Raven

Dock the canoe, and climb up the chain. At the top, stay on the left side (opposite the cog you’ll need to turn), and look through the hole in the structure ahead of you. The Raven is perched inside.

Lore Runes (The Squasher)

Use the gear to lower the gantry, and go across. Follow the main path around, up, and through the gate before jumping down to ignite more barrels. Climb up and around, then smash through the floor to fight the enemies. The Lore is on the wall on the left side of this area.

Lore Scroll (Passion)

Destroy the two barrels on the south/southeastern side of the smokestack with Atreus’ Sonic Arrows, and shimmy around. Make your way back to the gear, and use it to move the gantry to the very top of the tower. Climb back up the chain, and swing across, smashing through the wall in the structure ahead. Turn right, then look on the right side by the metal grate window for the scroll on the ground.

Legendary Chest

  • Reward: Njord’s Tempest – Light Runic Attack.

From the scroll, follow the path to the end to find this Legendary Chest.

Be sure to interact with the furnace at the base of the smokestack to shut down the mining rig and complete the location before moving on. For more collectibles locations, such as those at Radsvinn's Rig, click the link or head over to our growing Ragnarok guides hub

]]>
God of War: Ragnarok — The Weight of Chains Favor Walkthrough Guide https://www.gameskinny.com/xdfyl/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-weight-of-chains-favor-walkthrough-guide https://www.gameskinny.com/xdfyl/god-of-war-ragnarok-the-weight-of-chains-favor-walkthrough-guide Sat, 12 Nov 2022 01:20:40 -0500 Jonathan Moore

God of War: Ragnarok is full of compelling side quests called Favors. Some are as good, if not better than the main storyline itself. You’ll get The Weight of Chains Favor when you visit the Watchtower area in the Bay of Bounty. Quickly, you'll end up on the mysterious Lyngbakr Island. 

This walkthrough guide will tell you how to start the quest and complete it to add another Favor to your completion list and net you a silver trophy in the process. 

How to Complete The Weight of Chains Favor

From Sindri's forge, go right and destroy the gold barrier at the base of the wall. Climb up, and go right at the top to find a large locked door. Mimir will mention that he wants to right a wrong and that you’ll find the key to the door on Lyngbakr Island. Track the Favor to a marker on the island located in the middle of the Bay, east of Althjof’s Rig. 

Once on the island, use the Leviathan Axe to blow up the barrier to the right of the dock, and defeat the Wretches that spawn. Go up the path. Destroy the Wretch Nest at the top, and then climb up the small wall.

Go straight, then destroy the barrier along the cliff on the left side (past the gate in the rock). With the way now open, climb right along the cliff, then up to another area with more enemies. 

Here, defeat the Wretches and destroy the nest. Now, interact with the wheel mechanism in the ground by the weak floor to move the elevator all the way down.

Without letting go, use the Leviathan Axe to freeze the blue gear on the elevator shaft. Leave the mechanism. To progress, go back to where you climbed up into the area, climb down, then right to get on top of the elevator. Once there, recall your Axe to send the elevator up.

At the top, look down, then press X to use your Blades of Chaos to propel you down, breaking through the floor below. Be ready for a fight with a Bergsra Mother and its Wretches when you land. Defeat the enemies, and open the red chest in the room for the key.

Now it’s time to go back to the locked door at The Watchtower. Insert the key, and go through. Interact with the drum when Mimir asks you. A short scene will play, revealing what the island truly is. Afterward, go toward the door to leave, but kick down the metal barrier on the left side to quickly drop down. Get back in the canoe, and head toward the island. 

The dock is on the south side, almost directly north of Radsvinn’s Rig. Dock the canoe, and climb up the wall. Defeat the enemies at the top. Once you’ve done so, follow the path to the eastern gate, and destroy the gold barrier to its right. Interact with the large tether at the end, then cut the chain. After, destroy the second chain that appears by throwing your Axe at it. 

Go back to where you climbed up into the area from the dock, and jump over the gap in the walkway to the right. Follow it around to the right and up, then defeat the enemies at the top. After, climb the chain on the right side; be sure to grab the Lore Marker to the right at the top.

Continue forward, and use your Blades to swing across the gap, then follow the path to the end. Defeat the enemies, kick the chain down, and descend. Turn right (west) at the bottom, and you’ll see the next tether in front of you. Repeat the process from Tether 1. 

Destroy the Wretch Nest that appears just a bit further west, and pick up the Firebomb inside. Turn around, and go back to the chain you used to reach this area. Look down, and you’ll see another dock with a gold barrier on it. Throw the Firebomb to destroy the barrier, then return to the boat and use this new dock to reach the tail. 

There, climb the walls to the top, then defeat the enemies. Stay left (east/southeast), and climb up the short cliff to find the third tether. Cut it as you did the others. From here, use the zipline to the left to reach the chain on the tail. Pick up the Legendary Chest when you land, then cut the final chain. 

Use your blades to pull down the nearby palisade wall. Use the chain on the other side to reach the dock below. Take Mimir to the open eye on the south side. 

And that’s how to complete The Weight of Chains Favor in God of War: Ragnarok. You’ll get a good amount of XP for both Kratos and Atreus for your efforts, as well as the Making Amends silver trophy and a handful of collectibles. For more on Ragnarok, visit our guides page right here

]]>
Sonic Frontiers: Egg Memos Explained https://www.gameskinny.com/3i98e/sonic-frontiers-egg-memos-explained https://www.gameskinny.com/3i98e/sonic-frontiers-egg-memos-explained Fri, 11 Nov 2022 15:30:26 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are 24 Egg Memos in Sonic Frontiers. These small, portable audio recorders contain Dr. Eggman's voice recordings, where he describes his experiences while staying in Cyber Space, bits of lore especially interesting to long-time series fans.

What Are Egg Memos?

Egg Memos have been created by Dr. Eggman, also known as Doctor Ivo Robotnik. In the Sonic Frontiers lore, Dr. Eggman travels into the Cyber Space, a mysterious area accessible via portals on the Starfall islands.

Dr. Eggman made these recordings available for purchase, and you can buy them all to enrich your knowledge about both Dr. Eggman and Cyber Space. Sonic can also use them to communicate with characters in Cyber Space.

How to Get Egg Memos

Each Egg Memo costs 15 Treasure Tokens, and you can purchase them at the Trade Tokens store. Note that all 24 Egg Memos will cost you 360 treasure tokens.

You can earn Treasure Tokens by playing the "Fishing Spot" mini-games hosted by Big The Cat in Cyber Space. These spots are accessible via the purple portals on the Starfall Islands.

These mini-games are very easy, and all you need to do is cast a fishing rod and wait for the fish to come by. Depending on what type of fish you catch, Sonic gets the following rewards:

  • Black Bass: 3 tokens.
  • Carp: 3 tokens.
  • Crayfish: 1 token.
  • Chopper: 6 tokens.
  • Elder Koco's Scroll: 8 tokens.
  • Flying Fish: 1 token.
  • Goldfish: 1 token.
  • Hermit Koco's Scroll: 8 tokens.
  • Marlin: 6 tokens.
  • Medaka: 1 token.
  • Poison Dart Frog: 3 tokens.
  • Red Can: 3 tokens.
  • Red Stingray: 6 tokens.
  • Ring: 3 tokens.
  • Tadpole: 1 tokens.
  • Treasure Box: 1 Gold Card.

When you have enough tokens and you've purchased Egg Memos at the Token Store, you can listen to them by following these steps:

  1. Open the "Fishing Spot" menu.
  2. Select "View Fish-o-pedia" menu.
  3. Tab "Voice Logs" tab.
  4. Select an Egg Memo you wish to listen to.

That's all you need to know about the Egg Memos in Sonic Frontiers. If you were looking for a guide on how to light speed dash in Sonic Frontiers, then follow the provided link, or head over to our Frontiers guide hub for more.

]]>
Sonic Frontiers: High Speed Mode vs. Action Style Mode Explained https://www.gameskinny.com/tftil/sonic-frontiers-high-speed-mode-vs-action-style-mode-explained https://www.gameskinny.com/tftil/sonic-frontiers-high-speed-mode-vs-action-style-mode-explained Fri, 11 Nov 2022 11:58:53 -0500 Sergey_3847

There are two style settings in Sonic Frontiers, which can be selected by the players at the start of the game: Action Style and High Speed. Action Style is recommended for new players, and High Speed mode will be more comfortable for veteran Sonic players.

Our guide will explain in detail the difference of High Speed mode vs. Action Style mode in Sonic Frontiers.

Action Style Mode

This mode is specifically designed with platforming in mind, so that new players can ease into the Sonic gameplay from the very beginning.

For example, when a fast action takes place during any stage of the game, players will notice that the camera pulls back and the action slows down to a degree that you can determine what to do next.

This option can also be useful for younger players who have a hard time following the fast action of the game, or simply wish to enjoy the platforming aspect of Sonic Frontiers in greater detail.

High Speed Mode

If this mode is selected, then you should expect nothing else but a full-on Sonic experience with its trademark fast paced action.

The returning players who are well familiar with the Sonic franchise will love this mode, as it puts them right into the thick of the action with the closest possible camera perspective.

Of course, you should be well versed in the Sonic's moveset if you wish to play effectively in the High Speed mode. New players may find this mode more difficult, as it requires previous knowledge of this specific type of gameplay.

If new players still wish to try this mode out, then they at least should be aware of the following HUD elements for effective gameplay:

  • Speedometer.
  • Permanent waypoint.
  • Directional navigation.
  • World map.

Manual Speed Settings

Regardless of the chosen playstyle, you can always adjust the speed settings and other gameplay elements in the "Game Settings" section of the "Options" menu.

Here are the recommended manual settings for optimal gameplay:

  • Starting Speed: 40%-60%
  • Initial Boost Speed: 100%
  • Turning Speed: 40%-60%
  • Boost Turning Speed: 40%-60%
  • Top Speed: 10%-50%
  • Steering Sensitivity: 40%-60%
  • Acceleration: 100%
  • Bounce Height: 10%-50%
  • Camera Speed: 40%-60%

Hopefully, our guide helped you understand the difference of High Speed mode vs. Action Style mode in Sonic Frontiers. If you were looking for a guide on how to light speed dash in Sonic Frontiers, then follow the provided link.

]]>